advertisement
PREFACE
Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-7710-6 and
JMA-7725-6
／ 9.
This equipment is a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of marine ships. The equipment consists of a radar signal transceiver unit, a CRT display unit and a scanner unit as its main units.
The ATA NCA-843 unit is combined as an option with the JMA-7700 radar series.
● Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual carefully for correct operation.
● Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime.
Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occur.
● This manual covers the issues related to the operation of the radar and ATA only.
For the issues related to the operation of plotter functions, refer to the following instruction manual.
NDB-33: Instruction Manual for the Plotter
I
●
Before Operation
●
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safely and correctly and prevent any danger to you and ／ or to other persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
WARNING
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
CAUTION
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
Examples of pictorial indication
Disassembling prohibited
Disconnect the power plug
Electric shock
Prohibition
Instruction
The
▲
mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and
WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION (“Electric Shock” in the example on the left.)is shown in the mark.
The
mark represents prohibition.
Detailed contents of the prohibited action (“Disassembling
Prohibited” in the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
The
● mark represents instruction.
Detailed contents of the instruction (“Disconnect the power plug” in the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
II
●
Cautions to be Used During Operation
●
WARNING
Do not touch the insides of the scanner, transceiver and display unit.
Touching any high voltage area, you will get an electric shock. For maintenance, inspection and adjustment of internal parts of these equipment, consult with our sales office or distributor in your district.
Since the scanner radiator rotates, do not approach it.
The scanner may start rotating suddenly, and consequently any person may be struck and be injured. We recommend you to install the scanner radiator on the roof of the wheel house, flying bridge, trestle, radar mast or any other high position so that no person can approach it. When servicing the scanner, set the scanner safety button to the OFF position.
Install the scanner at any place higher than any person.
If being exposed directly to electric wave at close range, you may suffer adverse influence.
When approaching the antenna for maintenance or inspection, set the power button of the display unit to the ST-BY position.
If being exposed directly to electric wave at close range, you may suffer adverse influence.
CAUTION
Use these radar only as assisting devices for navigation.
Also, the officer should make the final decision for maneuvering by himself.
Use ATA only as an assisting device for navigation.
Also, the officer should make the final decision for maneuvering by himself.
ATA's information such as vector, target value data, alarm, etc. may contain some errors. Also, targets which cannot be detected with these radar cannot be tracked at their acquisition points.
III
◆◆◆◆
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION
◆◆◆◆
Cautions for high voltage
High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to the electronic equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any danger during normal operation, but sufficient cares are required for maintenance, inspection and adjustment of their internal components.
(Authorized maintenance personnel alone are permitted to implement maintenance, check-ups or adjustment of internal components.)
High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an instantaneous death from electric shock, but even voltages of hundreds volts may sometimes lead to a death from electric shock. To prevent such an accident, make it a rule to turn off the power button, discharge capacitors with a wire surely earthed on an end and make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you touch any parts inside these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also a necessary caution to put one of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries once you were shocked by electricity. If you were injured from electric shock, disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care of promptly.
What to do in case of electric shock
When finding a victim of electric shock, turn off the power source and earth the circuit immediately.
If it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly.
In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the respiration center in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity.
IV
◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆
FIRST AID TREATMENTS
◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆
✩ First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move him and practice artificial respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the rescuer may also get an electric shock.
(2) Turn off the power source calmly and certainly and move the victim away quietly from the electric line.
(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.
(4) Lay the victim on his back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(5) a. Examine the victim’s pulse.
b. Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart.
c. Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face close to his face.
d. Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.
(6) Open the victim’s mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum if any. Keep his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel in this mouth.)
(7) Then, close his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.
V
✩ When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
(1) Tilt the victim’s head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be inserted under his neck.)
(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).
(3) Pinch the victim’s nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath again and blow into his mouth. Continue this
10 to 15 times a minute (blocking his nostrils).
(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and stop practicing artificial respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim’s mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into one of his nostrils and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly, but let him lie calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea to keep him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)
Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising head
q w
Raise the victim’s head. Support his forehead with one of your hand and his neck with the other hand.
→ q
When you tilt his head backward, the victim, in most cases, opens his mouth to the air. This makes mouth-to-mouth respiration easy.
Cover his mouth as widely as possible with yours and press your cheek against his nose
→ w , or, pinch his nostrils with your fingers to prevent air from leaking.
→ e
e
Blow into his lungs.
Continue blowing into his mouth until his breast swells. Blow into his mouth as quickly as possible for the first 10 times.
Mouth-to-mouth respiration
VI
✩ When both pulse and breathing have stopped
When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is heard, cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must be performed.
(1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of his breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (repeat compressing his breast 50 times or so a minute). (Cardiac massage)
(2) In case of one rescuer,
Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times quickly, and repeat this combination.
In case of two rescuers,
One person repeats cardiac massages 5 times while the other person blows into his mouth once, and they shall repeat this combination. (Cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(3) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned to normal, stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of coffee or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit the victim to a medial specialist depending on his condition.
To let him recover from the mental shock, it is necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations and the necessary treatments.
q w e r
Cardiac massage
VII
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
Scanner Type NKE-1055-6 (6 feet)
Scanner Type NKE-1056-6M (6 feet)
Scanner Type NKE-1056-9M (9 feet)
Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
VIII
CONTENTS
Cautions to be Used During Operation ······················································ III
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION ····················································· IV
Cautions for high voltage .......................................................................................................... IV
What to do in case of electric shock .......................................................................................... IV
FIRST AID TREATMENTS ············································································ V
✩ First-aid treatments ..................................................................................................................... V
✩ When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped ...................................................................... VI
✩ When both pulse and breathing have stopped .......................................................................... VII
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ···································································· VIII
1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
1.1.1
Functions of This Equipment .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1.1
Functions of Radar .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1.2
Functions of ATA (Option) ............................................................................. 1-1
General System Diagram ································································1-10
Concept of Collision Avoidance Measures
(Explanatory Notes) ········································································1-14
2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL
SWITCHES AND MENU COMPOSITION
Names and Functions of Control Panel ··········································2-1
Menu Composition ··········································································2-13
2.2.1
Menu Selection .............................................................................................................. 2-13
2.2.2
Menu List ...................................................................................................................... 2-14
3. BASIC OPERATION
Flow of Operation ··············································································3-1
3.1.1
Turning Power on and Starting the System ..................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2
Degauss ........................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3
Tuning ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
IX
3.1.4
Observation and Video Adjustment ................................................................................ 3-4
3.1.5
Data Acquisition and Measurement ................................................................................ 3-4
3.1.6
Ending Operation and Stopping the System .................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1
Tuning [TUNE] .............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2
Adjusting Sensitivity [GAIN] ......................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3
Adjusting CRT Brilliance [BRILL] ................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.4
Suppressing Sea Clutter [SEA] ....................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.5
Suppressing Rain and Snow Clutter [RAIN] .................................................................. 3-7
3.2.6
Adjusting Brilliance ........................................................................................................ 3-8
3.2.7
Selecting DAY
／ NIGHT Modes [DAY ／ NIGHT] .................................................... 3-9
3.2.8
Setting Color .................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.2.8.1
Background Color ........................................................................................ 3-11
3.2.8.2
Setting Radar Video and Trails Color .......................................................... 3-12
3.2.9
Rejecting Radar Interference ......................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.10
Adjusting Control Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ······························································· 3-13
3.2.11
Stabilization ··················································································································· 3-14
Basic Operation ···············································································3-15
3.3.1
Using Trackball to Move Cursor "+" ............................................................................ 3-15
3.3.2
Using EBL (Electronic Cursor) [EBL1
／ EBL2] ......................................................... 3-15
3.3.3
Selecting Range Scales [RANGE] ................................................................................ 3-18
3.3.4
Selecting Pulse Width [PL] ........................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.5
Disabling Ship's Head Marker [HL OFF] ..................................................................... 3-18
3.3.6
Using Parallel Index Line .............................................................................................. 3-19
3.3.7
Selecting Presentation Mode [PRESENTATION MODE] ........................................... 3-21
3.3.8
Selecting True Motion
／ Relative Motion Display Modes
[TM ／ RM] [TM RST] ................................................................................................. 3-22
3.3.9
Changing Own Ship Display Position [OFF CENT] .................................................... 3-24
3.3.10
Displaying Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS] ····································································· 3-25
3.3.11
Displaying Fixed Range Ring [RR] ·············································································· 3-26
3.3.12
Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1 ／ VRM2] ·············································· 3-26
3.3.13
Using Alarm [GZ MENU] ···························································································· 3-28
3.3.14
Stopping Alarm ············································································································· 3-31
3.3.15
Setting Alarm Sound Level ··························································································· 3-32
3.3.16
Enhancing Target ·········································································································· 3-33
3.3.17
Setting Cross Cursor Length and Fixing Cursor Position ············································· 3-34
3.3.18
Displaying Ship's Stern Marker ····················································································· 3-36
3.3.19
Setting Range Unit in KM ····························································································· 3-37
3.3.20
Displaying Video Processing Screen ············································································ 3-39
3.3.21
Zooming Display ··········································································································· 3-41
3.3.22
Selecting Display Mode [MAP] ···················································································· 3-42
3.3.23
Using Electoronic Plot (EPA) ....................................................................................... 3-43
3.3.23.1
Plotting Target .............................................................................................. 3-43
3.3.23.2
Modifying Plot ............................................................................................. 3-44
3.3.23.3
Deleting Plot ................................................................................................. 3-44
X
3.3.23.4
Displaying Plot Numerical Data ................................................................... 3-45
3.3.23.5
Plot Symbol .................................................................................................. 3-46
3.3.23.6
Setting Vector Display ................................................................................. 3-47
3.3.23.7
Setting Vector Time ..................................................................................... 3-48
3.3.23.8
Displaying ／ Clearing Plot No. ................................................................... 3-49
3.3.23.9
Setting CPA
／ TCPA .................................................................................. 3-50
3.3.23.10 Turning Alarm Sound On ／ Off .................................................................. 3-52
3.3.23.11 Displaying
／ Clearing CPA Ring ................................................................ 3-53
3.3.24
Displaying Date and Time ............................................................................................. 3-54
3.3.25
Displaying the Plain Radar Screen ................................................................................ 3-55
3.3.26
Operation of the Performance Monitor ......................................................................... 3-57
Using Function Key [FUNC] ···························································3-62
3.4.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.4.2
Operation Method .......................................................................................................... 3-62
3.4.3
Function Setting Items ................................................................................................... 3-63
3.4.4
Operation Outline of the Function Setting Items .......................................................... 3-64
Displaying the Chart ·······································································3-75
3.5.1
Displaying the Shoreline ROM Card Made by JRC ..................................................... 3-75
3.5.2
Displaying the ERC Card .............................................................................................. 3-76
3.5.3
Displaying the JRC Chart .............................................................................................. 3-77
3.5.4
Displaying the Contour of the Shoreline ROM Card by JRC ....................................... 3-78
Displaying Own Ship Track ····························································3-79
3.6.1
Changing Track Color [When equipped with the plotter] ............................................. 3-79
3.6.2
Selecting Track Storing Interval .................................................................................... 3-79
3.6.3
Stopping Track Storing ................................................................................................. 3-81
3.6.4
Deleting Track by Color (Using the [COLOR] Control) .............................................. 3-83
3.6.5
Deleting Track by Color (Using Menu) ........................................................................ 3-85
3.6.6
Displaying or Hiding Track by Color ............................................................................ 3-87
Displaying Navigation Information ················································3-89
3.7.1
Creating the Navigation Information (Navigation Lines) ............................................. 3-89
3.7.2
Creating the Navigation Information (Coast Lines and Contour Lines) ....................... 3-92
3.7.3
Creating/Deleting the Navigation Information (Navigation Marks) ............................. 3-93
3.7.4
Turning On or Off Display of Destindtion Marks, Number and Comments ................ 3-94
3.7.5
Turning On or Off Display of Marks and Lines by Specifying Color or Shapes .......... 3-95
3.7.6
Deleting a Mark or Line by Specifying a Color or Shape ............................................. 3-96
3.7.7
Displaying Geodetic Datum .......................................................................................... 3-97
4. MEASUREMENT
Measurement with Trackball ····························································4-1
Measurement with Fixed Range Rings ············································4-2
Measurement between Two Optional Points of Target ··················4-4
XI
5. OPERATIONS OF ATA (OPTION)
5.1.1
Setting Collision Judgment Conditions : SAFE LIMIT ................................................. 5-2
5.1.2
Automatically Set Mode (at Activation) ......................................................................... 5-7
5.1.3
Setting a Range Scale ...................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1
Setting the Motion Display Mode [TM ／ RM] .............................................................. 5-8
5.2.2
Setting the Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ........................................................... 5-8
Target Acquisition ·············································································5-9
5.3.1
Automatic Acquisition .................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.2
Manual Acquisition ....................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.3
Setting ／ Deleting a Target Number ............................................................................ 5-10
Displaying the ATA Data ·································································5-11
5.4.1
Vector Display ............................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4.2
Past Position Display ..................................................................................................... 5-15
Data Reading ···················································································5-18
5.5.1
Types of Data Readouts to be Displayed ...................................................................... 5-18
5.5.2
Displaying Method of Numerical Data Readouts [TGT DATA] ................................. 5-19
Alarm Display ··················································································5-20
5.6.1
Dangerous Target Alarm : CPA
／ TCPA .................................................................... 5-20
5.6.2
Guard Zone Alarm ......................................................................................................... 5-21
5.6.3
Lost Target Alarm ......................................................................................................... 5-22
5.6.4
Stopping Alarm ............................................................................................................. 5-22
Erasing an Unnecessary Target ·····················································5-23
5.7.1
Erasing a Target per Target ........................................................................................... 5-23
5.7.2
Erasing All Targets ........................................................................................................ 5-23
Adjusting Intensity ··········································································5-24
Function Check ···············································································5-25
5.9.1
Vector Constant Setting (ATA) ..................................................................................... 5-25
5.9.2
Video Level Setting ....................................................................................................... 5-26
5.9.3
Checking the ATA Operation ........................................................................................ 5-29
5.10.1
Setting Target Past Track Function ............................................................................... 5-31
5.10.2
Specifying Target Past Track ........................................................................................ 5-32
5.10.3
Setting Target Past Track Color .................................................................................... 5-33
5.10.4
Setting Target Past Track Display ................................................................................. 5-34
5.10.5
Setting the Storage Interval ........................................................................................... 5-35
5.10.6
Erasing the Storage of Target Past Track by Specifying a Color .................................. 5-36
5.10.7
Erasing the Storage of Target Past Track by Specifying a Number .............................. 5-37
5.10.8
Reading Target Past Track from Card 2 ........................................................................ 5-38
5.10.9
Writing Target Past Track to Card 2 ............................................................................. 5-39
5.11 Turning ON and OFF the ATA Display ·········································· 5-40
5.12 Turning On and OFF the Alarm Sound of Dangerous and
XII
(Checking the ATA according to a Pseudo Target) ·····················5-42
6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
Radar Line-of-sight Range ·······························································6-1
Strength of Reflection from Target ··················································6-3
Display of Radar Transponder ·························································6-6
7. MAINTENANCE
Routine Maintenance ········································································7-1
7.1.1
Cleaning ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1.1
Cleaning of the Radar ..................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1.2
Cleaning of the ATA ...................................................................................... 7-1
Maintenance of Each Unit ·································································7-2
7.2.1
Scanner Unit NKE-1055 ／ 1056 .................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2
Display Unit NCD-3901-2 .............................................................................................. 7-4
8. COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE
AND ADJUSTMENT
Function Check ·················································································8-1
8.1.1
Function Check ................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2
Testing Functions with Menu .......................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2.1
Memory Test .................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.2.2
Key Switch Test ............................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.2.3
Sensor Test ..................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.2.4
Line Test ......................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.2.5
ATA Status ..................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.2.6
ROM Version ................................................................................................. 8-5
8.1.2.7
Error Logging ................................................................................................. 8-6
8.1.2.8
Magnetron Current, Running and Transmission Time ................................... 8-7
Troubleshooting ··············································································8-10
8.3.1
Troubleshooting for the Radar ...................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.2
ATA Traubleshooting .................................................................................................... 8-12
Replacement of Major Parts ···························································8-14
Adjustment and Setting ··································································8-19
8.5.1
NSK Unit Adjustment ................................................................................................... 8-19
8.5.2
Adjustment and Setting at Installation .......................................................................... 8-22
8.5.2.1
Adjusting Tuning .......................................................................................... 8-22
8.5.2.2
Adjusting Bearing ......................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.2.3
Adjusting Range ........................................................................................... 8-24
8.5.2.4
Setting Antenna Height ................................................................................ 8-25
XIII
8.5.3
Various Setting .............................................................................................................. 8-26
8.5.3.1
Setting Own Ship Speed Equipment ............................................................ 8-26
8.5.3.2
Setting True Bearing .................................................................................... 8-27
8.5.3.3
Setting Ship Speed ........................................................................................ 8-28
8.5.3.4
Setting Drift .................................................................................................. 8-29
8.5.3.5
Setting PRF ................................................................................................... 8-30
8.5.3.6
Setting Transmission Repetition Frequency ................................................. 8-31
8.5.3.7
Connecting Navigation Equipment .............................................................. 8-32
8.5.3.8
Adjustment of the Performance Monitor Operation ..................................... 8-34
8.5.4
GPS Initial Setting
／ Receiving Status ........................................................................ 8-35
8.5.4.1
GPS Initial Setting ........................................................................................ 8-35
8.5.4.2
Checking GPS Receiving Status .................................................................. 8-39
8.5.5
Setting DGPS
／ Checking DGPS Receiving Status .................................................... 8-41
8.5.5.1
Setting DGPS ............................................................................................... 8-41
8.5.5.2
Checking DGPS Receiving Status ............................................................... 8-43
8.5.6
Maintenance Menu ........................................................................................................ 8-44
8.5.6.1
Antenna Switch ............................................................................................ 8-44
8.5.6.2
Partial Master Reset ...................................................................................... 8-45
8.5.6.3
Total Master Reset ........................................................................................ 8-45
8.5.6.4
Internal Setting to Card 2 ............................................................................. 8-45
8.5.6.5
Card 2 to Internal Setting ............................................................................. 8-46
8.5.6.6
User Memory ................................................................................................ 8-47
8.5.6.7
Restoring User Memory ............................................................................... 8-47
8.5.7
Adjusting Position to Chart ........................................................................................... 8-49
8.5.7.1
Adjusting Video and Chart Using Trackball (R+P Mode) ........................... 8-49
8.5.7.2
Adjusting Video and Chart Position by Entering Adjustment Value
(R+P and Plotter Modes) .............................................................................. 8-50
8.5.7.3
Adjusting Position by Changing Latitude
／ Longitude Information from GPS (R+P and Plotter Modes) ............................................................. 8-51
8.5.7.4
Adjusting Position by Fixing Own Ship at Screen Center ........................... 8-52
9. AFTER-SALES SERVICE
10. DISPOSAL
10.1 Equipment Disposal ········································································10-1
10.2 Disposal of Used Batteries ·····························································10-2
10.3 Disposal of Used Magnetron ··························································10-3
11. SPECIFICATION
／ JMA-7725-6 ／ JMA-7725-9····································11-1
11.2 Scanner Unit NKE-1055-6 ······························································11-2
／ 9M ·················································11-3
11.4 Display Unit NCD-3901-2 ································································11-4
XIV
11.5 ATA NCA-843 (Optional) ································································11-7
11.8 Standard Equipment Configuration ··············································11-8
11.9 Installing Clearance between Equipment ····································· 11-8
APPENDIX
Attached Figures
Appendix 1 Radar System Circuit Code List
Appendix 2 Circuit Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6 and JMA-7725-6
Appendix 3 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6
Appendix 4 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7725-6
Appendix 5 Primary Power Supply System Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6 and JMA-7725-6
Appendix 6 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1055
Appendix 7 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1056
Appendix 8 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 9 Power Supply Connection Diagram of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 10 NSK Log Selection Switches of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 11 Setting Table of the Speed Log Select Switches of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 12 Setting Table of the Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches of Display Unit Type
XV
GLOSSARY
This section explains common maritime terms and the terms used for this equipment.
ATA (Automatic Tracking Aid) :
Fast Time Constant (FTC) :
Sensitivity Time Control (STC) :
Bearing :
COG :
CPA/TCPA :
CUP (Course-UP) :
EBL (Electric Bearing Line) :
GPS (Global Positioning System) :
Ground stabilization :
Guard zone :
Heading :
HL :
HUP (Head-UP) :
IMO :
IR :
NM :
NSK :
NUP (North-UP) :
Own track :
Range ring :
RM (Relative Motion) :
RM display :
Relative bearing :
Supporting equipment for automatically preventing clash.
Rain and snow clutter suppression.
Sea surface clutter suppression.
Direction
Course over Ground
Closest point of approach and time to closest point of approach limit as defined by the observer to give warning when a tracked target or targets will close to within these limits from own ship
An azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting the centre of own ship with the top of the display is own ship's intended course
Electric bearing line centering the position of the own ship.
Internationally-used positioning system.
A mode of display whereby own ship and all targets are referenced to the ground using ground track or set and drift inputs
A zone in which an alarm is given when a target is detected
The direction in which the bows of a ship are pointing expressed as an angular displacement from north
Heading Line
Display mode in which the top of the screen corresponds to the ship's head maker.
International Maritime Organization
Interference Rejector
Nautical Mile (1 nm = 1,852 m)
Gyro compass and log interface
An azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting the centre of own ship with the top of the display is north true bearing
Automatic track display function.
Fixed range ring.
The combination of relative course and relative speed
A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed and all targets move relative to own ship
The direction of a target from own ship expressed as an angular displacement from own ship's heading
XVI
Relative course :
Relative speed :
Relative vector :
Scan CORR :
Scanner :
Sea stabilization :
Target ENH :
TM (True Motion) :
TM display :
VRM :
Trails :
The direction of motion of a target relative to own ship's position expressed as an angular displacement from north. It is deduced from a number of measurements of target range and bearing on own ship's radar
The speed of a target relative to own ship's position. It is deduced from a number of measurements of target range and bearing on own ship's radar
The predicted movement of a target relative to own ship
Target emphatic processing function.
Antenna unit.
A mode of display whereby own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea, using gyro heading and single axis log water speed inputs
Target enhancing function.
The combination of true course and true speed
A display across which own ship and each target moves with its own true motion
Variable Range Marker
Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of a synthetic afterglow. The trails may be either relative or true.
SOG :
True bearing :
True course :
True speed :
True vector :
The true trails may be sea or ground stabilized
Speed over Ground
The direction of a target from own ship or from another target expressed as an angular displacement from north
The true direction of motion of a target expressed as an angular displacement from north. It is obtained by a vector combination of target relative motion and own ship's true motion
The speed of a target obtained by a vector combination of target relative motion and own ship's true motion
The predicted true motion of a target as a result of own ship's direction and speed input. The true vector may be either displayed with reference to the water or to the ground
Performance monitor :
Additional equipment for monitoring transmission power and receiving sensitivity.
Floating EBL (Electric Bearing Line) : Electric bearing line centering a certain point.
XVII
XVIII
1
2
3
GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
1
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL
PANEL SWITCHES AND MENU COMPOSITION
2
BASIC OPERATION
3
4
MEASUREMENT
5
OPERATIONS OF ATA (OPTION)
6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
4
5
6
7
8
MAINTENANCE
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE
AND ADJUSTMENT
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
9
10
DISPOSAL
11
SPECIFICATION
7
8
9
10
11
APPENDIX
1
GENERAL AND
EQUIPMENT
COMPOSITION
1.1
Functions······························································1-1
1.2
Features ································································1-3
1.3
Composition ·························································1-4
1.4
Configuration ·······················································1-5
1.5
General System Diagram ··································1-10
1.6
Concept of Collision Avoidance Measures
(Explanotory Notes) ··········································1-14
1.1
Functions
This equipment is a high performance, high quality, highly reliable and totally-large-scale-integrated
(excluding special electronic tubes) radar composed of a scanner, a transceiver and a display unit with a high resolution color CRT which adopts the raster scan method.
1.1.1 Functions of This Equipment
1.1.1.1 Functions of Radar
The JMA-7700 series color radar is designed in accordance with IMO (International Maritime Organization) specifications based on international standards. The major functions include target detecting color display, sea, rain or snow clutter restraint, sensitivity adjustment, interference rejection, distance and bearing measurement using a trackball, fixed and variable distance markers and an electronic cursor as well as
Standard equipment ATA (manual and automatic target acquisition and vector, tracking and warning display), a plotter (own ship tracking and coastal line display) and an optional simple plotter (make and line display as well as target and course setting).
1.1.1.2 Functions of ATA (Option)
This system, on which a radar is used as a sensor, can be outlined as follows by function:
[I] First Stage : Target Detection from Radar Information
This work corresponds to plotting targets by hand on the radar screen. Assume that a ship is approaching the own ship. You can catch the ship on the radar. Signals from the ship are processed with the data processor and are transferred to the computer as signals of bearing and range related to the own ship. In this stage, the system has the functions to quantize radar information, to reject noises, to eliminate any information other than ship information and to transfer necessary position data of ships to the computer.
[II] Second Stage : Target Tracking
Targets are plotted at intervals of 3 or 6 minutes with the radar, but tracking on this system is to plot them electrically at intervals of fixed times. This means to compare target position data to be detected every moment with those detected previously so as to check if they are of the same target and also to save data of the target in its file so as to calculate changes of position data of the target.
[III] Third Stage : Judgement of Existence of Ship in Danger of Collision
In this stage, the system calculates speeds and courses of a target ship from ever-changing position data of the target ship obtained in the previous stage so as to judge existence of any danger of collision.
After the calculation, the system can easily calculate the closes point of approach to the own ship
(CPA = Closest Point of Approach) and the time required to reach the CPA (TCPA = Time to CPA).
Both the CPA and the TCPA are compared with the value previously set according to the situations of the own ship so as to judge existence of any danger of collision.
1 – 1
1.1
[IV] Fourth Stage : Indication
The above information must be informed to the officer maneuvering the own ship. A variety of indicating methods are available including cathode ray tube and numerical indicator, and various data are available.
This system indicates unprocessed video, vectors (to be selected from true vector and relative vector) of other ships and identification marks of danger ship or safe ship for these ships on the usual radar scope. When the target ship is a danger one, the system will sound an alarm and turns on the alarm lamp to alert the officer.
1
1 – 2
1.2
Features
Large, high resolution, easily visible diaplay
Thanks to the built-in high-precision (1024
× 768 pixels), non interlacing 21-inch color CRT, a radar video area of more than 250 mm is available. High resolution, near range video images can also be displayed.
Target detection using latest signal processing technology
Unnecessary clutter is eliminated from radar video signals received by the wide dynamic range receiver using the latest digital signal processing technology, improving target detecting performance.
Three (radar, composite and optional plotter) mode display
● In the composite mode, radar video, coastal line and own ship tracks can all be displayed simultaneously.
● In the plotter mode, marks and lines can be created and displayed as well as destination and courses set using the optional plotter function.
Up to 20,000 points can be used for own ship tracks, marks, and so forth.
Easy-to-operate key arrangement
The basic radar functions can easily be operated since the system has only with the minumum number of keys, enabling quick handling even in an emergency. Various other functions are also available through easy key operation and screen menu selection.
Optional ATA utilizing the latest technologies
The acquiring and tracking functions of the ATA have been improved by adopting the latest radar signal processing and tracking technologies, achieving stable performance even when tracking objects in a clutter.
● Up to 30 targets can be acquired and tracked.
● Hazard statuses are identified by sound displayed using colored symbols with different shapes.
● Fine display of other ship tracks (10 ships × 800 points each) and 7-color display.
Enhanced functions for day and night
The hues of all 4 screens (2 each for day and night) can be set, enabling screen colors to be reproduced according to the operating environment through simple key operation. The screen are very easy to see since echo videos and various graphics are differentiated by color.
Multiple functions
● Radar trailing
● TM (True Motion) display
● Head-up, north-up, course-up and stabilized course-up display
● Own ship track display
● Guard alarm function
1 – 3
1.3
Composition
Equipment componets
Radar type
JMA-7710-6
JMA-7725-6
JMA-7725-9
Scanner unit Display unit
NKE-1055-6
(6ft slot anttenna)
× 1
NKE-1056-6M
(6ft slot antenna)
× 1
NKE-1056-9M
(9ft slot antenna)
× 1
NCD-3901-2
× 1
NCD-3901-2
× 1
NDC-3901-2
× 1
Transmitting output
10 kW
25 kW
25 kW
Band
Remarks
X
Ship's power supply
AC220V,
50 ／ 60Hz, 1
φ
AC100
／ 110V,
50 ／ 60HZ, 1
φ
Spare parts and attachments
Item
Spare parts
Hood
Instruction manual
Code
6ZXRD00194
Qty.
6 Display unit fuse
6 Display unit fuse
3 Display unit fuse
Remarks
MF60NR-10A
MF60NR-5A
MF60NR-0.5A
6 Display unit fuse MF61-TS7
9 Display unit power supply circuit fuse
MF51NN-3.15A
3 Display unit power supply circuit fuse
MF51NN-10A
12 Display unit NSK circuit fuse MF51NN-0.5A
3 Display unit monitor power supply circuit fuse
MF51NN-0.5A
2 Scanner unit NKE-1055 carbon brush S00152-5C-70
54511-03 2 Scanner unit NKE-1056 carbon brush
MPOL30274A 1
7ZPRD0524 1
1
1 – 4
1.4
Configuration
Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1055-6 .................... Fig. 1.1
Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1056-6M ................. Fig. 1.2
Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1056-9M ................. Fig. 1.3
Outline Drawing of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2 ..................... Fig. 1.4
1 – 5
1.4
1
MASS APPROX. 33 O (SCANNER UNIT)
MASS APPROX. 3 O (PM UNIT)
UNIT mm
Fig. 1.1 Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1055-6
1 – 6
1.4
MASS APPROX. 41 O
UNIT mm
Fig. 1.2 Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1056-6M
1 – 7
1.4
1
MASS APPROX. 47 O
UNIT mm
Fig. 1.3 Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1056-9M
1 – 8
1.4
MASS APPROX. 63 O
UNIT mm
Fig. 1.4 Outline Drawing of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
1 – 9
1.5
General System Diagram
General System Drawing of Radar Type JMA-7710-6 ................. Fig. 1.5
General System Drawing of Radar Type JMA-7725-6 ................. Fig. 1.6
General System Drawing of Radar Type JMA-7725-9 ................. Fig. 1.7
1
1 – 10
1.5
Fig. 1.5 General System Drawing of Radar Type JMA-7710-6
1 – 11
Fig. 1.6 General System Drawing of Radar Type JMA-7725-6
1 – 12
1.5
1
1.5
Fig. 1.7 General System Drawing of Radar Type JMA-7725-9
1 – 13
1.6
Concept of Collision Avoidance Measures
(Explanatory Notes)
COLLISION AVOIDANCE
Necessity of Collision Avoidance ····························································
Disasters at sea, in particular collisions, have been highlighted as ship’s tonnage and speed as well as ocean traffic increased.
A collision of a tanker carrying dangerous matter(s) such as crude oil against a ship brings considerable damages to not only the tanker and the ship but also other ships traveling around, port facilities, inhabitants along nearby coast, fishery resources, etc.
In recent years, the percentage of collisions to disasters at sea has greatly increased. To cope with such situations, some measures to prevent ships from collision have been eagerly required and various equipment have been developed.
Collision Avoidance Problems in Navigation ··········································
To avoid collisions of ships has been recognized as one of navigational problems since early times. This section briefly describes how collision avoidance is positioned among navigational problems.
The navigation pattern of all vehicles is considered to be a system consisting of some closed loops irrespective of the media through which vehicles pass, such as air, water, boundary of the both and cosmic space. This pattern is considered in general to consist of two closed loops. One loop is for avoidance of collision against other vehicles, and the other is for finding safe and correct courses to predetermined destinations.
Fig. 1.8 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern of E.W. Anderson. The closed loop for collision avoidance is shown on the left side while the one for finding correct courses is shown on the right side.
Collision avoidance
Destination
Decision of course
Traffic rule
Vessel’s spacing loop
Visual and radio watch
Collision avoidance loop
Judgment
Course
Source, Speed
Guide loop
Dead reckoning
Calculation
Fixing by radio wave, visual and celestial observation
Compass and log
Maneuver
Control loop Instrument or
Judgment
Ship traveling in controlled condition
Fig. 1.8 Navigation Pattern
1
1 – 14
1.6
Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance ····················································
Collision avoidance has two aspects: prediction and avoidance of collision. The prediction of collision is to predict that plural ships come across at a point, and the avoidance is to maneuver ships so as not to come across at the same point with other ships.
In actual practice of maneuvering ships, however, a closed area should be considered instead of a single point. This concept is the CPA (Closest Point of Approach). To predict a collision, it is also necessary to take into account the times that ships take to reach the CPA, and these times are called the TCPA (Time to CPA), which is used to judge dangers of collision. Fig. 1.9 shows the chart called “Collision Triangle.”
Fig. 1.9 Collision Triangle
1 – 15
1.6
Relative Vector and True Vector ·······························································
When collision avoidance is considered from the view point of the two aspects (prediction and avoidance), the relative vector is necessary for the prediction and the true vector is necessary for the avoidance to find aspects of other ships.
Fig. 1.10 shows the relations between the relative vector and the true vector.
The meanings of the both vectors are as follows:
The relative vector, first of all, enables us to easily understand the outlines of the CPA and the
TCPA. The merit of this vector is that the user can understand, at a glance, the degree of danger that all ships shown on the radar scope will collide against each other.
The true vector enables us to easily know speeds and courses of other ships and to find all the aspects at a glance. In the other words, we can find the traffic situations (such as transverse, out sailing, parallel running, reverse running, etc.) stipulated in the Provision of Collision at Sea Act.
So, when finding a ship which is going to collide against the own ship, the user can find what rule is applied and how to maneuver the own ship.
1
True vector
V
O
: Own ship speed
θ
O
: Own ship course
V
T
: Target ship true speed
V
R
: Target ship relative speed
θ
T
: Target ship true course
θ
R
: Target ship relative course
θ
A
: Aspect
Relative vector
Fig. 1.10 True Vector and Relative Vector
Radar and Collision Avoidance ································································
Radar is still playing an important role for prevention of collision as well as for measuring positions.
A plotter is used to improve functions of radar. This plotter is used to check movements of other ships by plotting their positions at intervals of 3 or 6 minutes. The plotting enables the user to know traces of these ships in relation with the own ship and the possibility of collision, or CPA and TCPA. This method is considered effective but should be executed by person, and the number of target ships is limited and the execution takes some minutes.
1 – 16
1.6
Set Stabilization ·························································································
Sea stabilization gives correct course and speed through the water.
Heading and Speed inputs from gyro compass and a single axis log (or manually set speed) provide a sea stabilized presentation.
The entire philosophy of Collision Avoidance is based upon knowledge of the heading of other vessels in close quater situations. Only the sea stabilized presentation displays the heading of moving targets.
This presentation provides a good display for Collision Avoidance.
For selecting the sea stabilization, see the subsection “8.5.3.1 Setting Own Ship Speed Equipment”.
1 – 17
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
OF CONTROL PANEL
SWITCHES AND MENU
COMPOSITION
2.1
Names and Functions of Control Panel·············2-1
2.2
Menu Composition ············································2-13
2.1
Names and Functions of Control Panel
CAUTION
Do not put anythig on the touch panel.
Deforming may occur if a hot object is placed on it.
Do not apply a strong shock to the touch panel, track ball, and controls, otherwise they may get out of order.
2 – 1
2.1
48
11 10
COLOR BRILL
2
JMA-7700 SERIES
RASTER SCAN RADAR
52
21
53
27
28
29
45
1 35 36 38 33 15 37
47 2 30 42 14 17 31 32
16 5 4 39 34
PWR
TX
STBY
DEGAUSS
EBL1
EBL2
EBL
OFF
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
CLR
0
ENT
MAIN
MENU
F EBL
MARK
MENU
SUB
MENU
GZ
MENU
OWN
TRK
MAP
DAY
NIGHT
VECT
TRK
VECT−
DEST
TGT
DATA
VECT＋
TM
RST
AZI
MODE
RR
TM
RM
PL
OFF
CENT
PANEL TRAILS
ALARM
ACK
FUNC
VRM1
VRM2
HL
OFF
+
RANGE
-
VRM
OFF
GAIN AUTO TUNE AUTO SEA
49 51
AUTO RAIN
50
TGT
CNCL
ACQ
3
22 7
46 6 9 23 8 12
20 13 40 41 43 44 19 18
24 26 25
Display Control Panel
2 – 2
2.1
Operation controls and keys
Those preceded by a number enclosed in a box are the controls and keys used with ATA model NCA-843.
z
[SUB MENU] key
Displays the sub menu on the screen.
x
[MAIN MENU] key
Displays the main menu on the screen.
e
Trackball
Moves the cursor to a desired position.
r
/
t
[ −
Select the range between 0.125 and 96/120 nautical mile.
y
[TUNE] control
Controls the target on the screen to be seen most clearly.
u
[GAIN] control
Controls the receiving sensitivity of the radar.
i
[RAIN] control
Decreases clutter videos due to rain or snow.
o
[SEA] control
Decreases clutter videos due to reflection from the sea surface.
!0
[BRILL] control
Adjusts the brilliance of the display.
⁄1
[COLOR] control
Sets the color for the own and other ship tracks, marks and lines.
(7 colors: white, sky, blue, green, yellow, pink and red)
!2
[FUNC] key
Selects the pre-set video processing
⁄3
[GZ MENU] key
Displays the menu for setting an alarm.
!4
[MAP] key
Switches the system to the radar, composite or plotter mode.
!5
[AZI MODE] key
Switches the screen to the true bearing, relative bearing, course-up or stabilized course-up mode.
!6
[HL OFF] key
The HL (Heading Line) can be cleared while this switch is being pressed.
2 – 3
2.1
!7
[DAY
／ NIGHT] key
Switches the screen color and brilliance according to each setting.
!8
[OFF CENT] key
Moves the position of the own ship within the screen to display your desired direction wide (within
66% of the radius) or returns the ship to the center.
!9
[RR] (RANGE RINGS) key
Turns the fixed range scale display on and off.
@0
[TRAILS] key
Displays or deletes the radar trail.
@1
[TX
／ STBY] key
Selects between the transmission and standby modes.
@2
[PANEL] key
Adjusts the character light brilliance of each switch and control on the control panel.
@3
[ALARM ACK] key
Stops alarm sound.
@4
[VRM1
／ VRM2] key
Selects the display of variable range scale 1 or 2.
@5
[VRM OFF] key
Selects turning on or off of the display of variable range scale 1 or 2.
@6
[VRM] control
Changes the variable range scale size.
When the parallel index lines is displayed, the parallel line interval is changed
@7
[EBL1
／ EBL2] key
Selects the display of EBL1, EBL2 or the parallel index lines.
@8
[EBL OFF] key
Selects turning on or off of the display of EBL1, EBL2 or the parallel index lines.
@9
[EBL] control
Turns the bearing of EBL1, EBL2 or the parallel index lines.
#0
[F EBL
／
] (floating EBL) key
Switches the EBL2 to the floating EBL.
#1
[TM RST] key
Manually resets the own ship position in the true motion display mode.
#2
[TM
／ RM] key
Switches the screen display to the true motion (TM), to the relative motion (RM), to the stabilized relative motion (SRM) or to the true motion with constant own ship position (CTM).
2
2 – 4
2.1
‹3
[TGT DATA] key
Displays the target numerical values or sets or clears the target number using the EPA or ATA.
#4
[ACQ] key
Manually acquires the target when the EPA or ATA is used.
#5
[ ] (originating point) key
Measures the distance between two points with the end point switch (in the radar mode).
Sets the simple course between two points with the end point switch (in the composite and plotter modes).
#6
[ ] (end point) key
Measures the distance between two points with the originating point switch (in the radar mode).
Sets the simple course between two points with the originating point switch (in the composite and plotter modes).
#7
[PL] key
Switches the transmission pulse length (short, medium and long).
‹8
[VECT
／ TRK] key
Switches the vector display between true and relative.
‹9
[TGT CNCL] key
Cancels the target symbol and vector which are being tracked by the EPA or ATA and stops the tracking.
$0
[ ] (reverse) key
Turns the cursor display on and off and fixes it.
Used for the numerical data display in the EPA or ATA.
$1
[OWN TRK] key
Enables the [COLOR] control to set the own ship track color.
Opens the menu for setting the own ship track storing interval, memory clear, etc.
$2
[MARK MENU] key
Enables the [COLOR] control to set the mark and line colors.
›3
[VECT
−／ DEST] key
Decreases the vector length when the EPA or ATA is used.
›4
[VECT
＋／
] key
Increases the vector length when the EPA or ATA is used.
$5
[0 to 9] keys
Selects menu items and enters numerical data, etc.
Enters the event and cursor marks and lines when the plotter function is added.
$6
[ENT] key
Selects menu items and enters numerical data.
2 – 5
$7
[CLR] key
Clears the entry of numerical data and the target number in the EPA or ATA, etc.
$8
ROM
／ RAM card slot
The JRC ／ ERC chart ROM card is inserted here to display the chart.
The RAM card is inserted here to plays back the data stored inside.
$9
[TUNE] key
Turns automatic tuning on and off.
%0
[RAIN] key
Turns auto rain
／ snow reflection restraint on and off.
%1
[SEA] key
Turns auto sea surface reflection restraint on and off.
%2
[PWR] switch
Turns the radar on and off.
%3
[DEGAUSS] key
Degausses the display.
2.1
2
2 – 6
2.1
q w e r t y u i o !0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
@6 @7
Screen Readouts
2 – 7
#0
@8
@9
2.1
q
Range
／ range ring spacing
→ 3.3.3
Selecting Range Scales [RANGE]
／
w
Bearing display
3.3.11
Displaying Fixed Range Ring [RR]
→ 3.3.7
Selecting Presentation Mode [PRESENTA-
TION MODE]
e
Relative motion (RM)
／ true motion (TM) display
→ 3.3.8
Selecting True Motion
／ Relative Motion
Display Modes [TM
／ RM] [TM RST]
r
Standby (STBY)
／ transmission (TX) display
→ 3.1.1
Turning Power on and Starting the System
t
Frequency band display
y
Mode selection display
→ 3.3.22
Selecting Display Mode [MAP]
u
Speed over ground
i
Course over ground
o
Own ship speed
!0
Own ship heading direction
!1
Stabilization mode display
!2
Target expansion display
→ 3.3.16
Enhancing Target
!3
Radar interference rejection
→ 3.2.9
Rejecting Radar Interference
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
Set
Drift
Video processing
Radar track (Trails)
Auto FTC or Auto STC
Day
／ night display
→ 8.5.3.4
Setting Drift
→ 8.5.3.4
Setting Drift
→ 3.3.20
Displaying Video Processing Screen
→ 3.3.10
Displaying Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS]
→ 3.2.4
→ 3.2.7
Suppressing Sea Clutter [SEA]
Selecting DAY
／ NIGHT Modes [DAY ／
NIGHT]
→ 3.4
Using Function Key [FUNC]
@0
Function name
@1
Cursor fixed display
@2
Pulse width
@3
Tuning indicator
@4
EBL 1
／ 2 bearing
@5
VRM 1
／ 2 range
→ 3.3.4
→ 3.2.1
→ 3.3.2
Selecting Pulse Width [PL]
Tuning [TUNE]
Using EBL (Electronic Cursor) [EBL1
／
EBL2]
→ 3.3.12
Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1
／ VRM2]
@6
Cursor bearing
／ range from own ship to cursor
@7
Cursor position LAT
／ LON
@8
Target data EPA
→ 3.3.23.4 Displaying Plot Numerical Data
@9
Own ship position LAT
／ LON
#0
Alarm indication EPA
→ 3.3.23.10 Turning Alarm Sound On ／ Off
2 – 8
2
2.1
q w e r t y u i o !0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
@6 @7
Screen Readouts with ATA
2 – 9
@8
@9
2.1
q
Range
／ range ring spacing
→ 3.3.3
Selecting Range Scales [RANGE]
／
w
Bearing display
→ 3.3.11
Displaying Fixed Range Ring [RR]
→ 3.3.7
Selecting Presentation Mode [PRESEN-
TATION MODE]
e
Relative motion (RM)
／ true motion (TM) display
→ 3.3.8
Selecting True Motion
／ Relative Motion
Display Modes [TM
／ RM] [TM RST]
r
Standby (STBY)
／ transmission (TX) display
→ 3.1.1
Turning Power on and Starting the System
t
Frequency band display
y
Mode selection display
→ 3.3.22
Selecting Display Mode [MAP]
u
Speed over ground
i
Course over ground
o
Own ship speed
!0
Own ship heading direction
!1
Stabilization mode display
!2
Target expansion display
→ 3.3.16
Enhancing Target
!3
Radar interference rejection
→ 3.2.9
Rejecting Radar Interference
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
Set
Drift
Video processing
Radar track (Trails)
Auto FTC or Auto STC
Day
／ night display
→ 8.5.3.4
Setting Drift
→ 8.5.3.4
Setting Drift
→ 3.3.20
Displaying Video Processing Screen
→ 3.3.10
Displaying Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS]
→ 3.2.4
→ 3.2.7
Suppressing Sea Clutter [SEA]
Selecting DAY
／ NIGHT Modes [DAY ／
NIGHT]
@0
Function name
@1
Cursor fixed display
@2
@3
Pulse width
Tuning indicator
→ 3.4
→ 3.3.4
→ 3.2.1
Using Function Key [FUNC]
Selecting Pulse Width [PL]
Tuning [TUNE]
@4
EBL 1
／ 2 bearing
@5
VRM 1
／ 2 range
→ 3.3.12
Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1
／ VRM2]
@6
Cursor bearing
／ range from own ship to cursor
@7
Cursor position LAT
／ LON
@8
Target data of ATA
→ 5.5.1
@9
Own ship position LAT
／ LON
Types of Data Readouts to be Displayed
2
2 – 10
q w e r
2.1
t y
#2 u i o !0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
@6 @7
Screen Readouts With Plotter Option and ATA (R+P Mode)
2 – 11
#0
#1
@8
@9
2.1
q
Range
／ range ring spacing
→ 3.3.3
Selecting Range Scales [RANGE]
／
w
Bearing display
→ 3.3.11
Displaying Fixed Range Ring [RR]
→ 3.3.7
Selecting Presentation Mode [PRESENTA-
TION MODE]
e
Relative motion (RM)
／ true motion (TM) display
→ 3.3.8
Selecting True Motion
／ Relative Motion
Display Modes [TM
／ RM] [TM RST]
r
Standby (STBY)
／ transmission (TX) display
→ 3.1.1 Turning Power on and Starting the System
t
Frequency band display
y
Mode selection display
→ 3.3.22
Selecting Display Mode [MAP]
u
Speed over ground
i
Course over ground
o
Own ship speed
!0
Own ship heading direction
!1
Stabilization mode display
!2
Target expansion display
→ 3.3.16
Enhancing Target
!3
Radar interference rejection
→ 3.2.9
Rejecting Radar Interference
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
Set
Drift
Video processing
Radar track (Trails)
Auto FTC or Auto STC
Day
／ night display
→ 8.5.3.4
Setting Drift
→ 8.5.3.4
Setting Drift
→ 3.3.20
Displaying Video Processing Screen
→ 3.3.10
Displaying Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS]
→ 3.2.4
→ 3.2.7
Suppressing Sea Clutter [SEA]
Selecting DAY
／ NIGHT Modes [DAY ／
NIGHT]
@0
Function name
@1
Cursor fixed display
@2
@3
Pulse width
Tuning indicator
→ 3.4
→ 3.3.4
→ 3.2.1
Using Function Key [FUNC]
Selecting Pulse Width [PL]
Tuning [TUNE]
@4
EBL 1
／ 2 bearing
@5
VRM 1
／ 2 range
→ 3.3.12
Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1
／ VRM2]
@6
Cursor bearing
／ range from own ship to cursor
@7
Cursor position LAT
／ LON
@8
Target data of ATA
→ 5.5.1
@9
Own ship position LAT
／ LON
Types of Data Readouts to be Displayed
#0
Own track color
#1
Mark
／ Line color
#2
Correcting chart posion
2 – 12
2
2.2
Menu Composition
In addition to functions to be selected using keys on the front panel, this radar has some other functions available on menus. To select these functions, press the numeric keys (
0
to
9
),
CLR
and
ENT
keys.
The menu are composed as follows:
MAIN
MENU
[MAIN MENU]
Pressing this key opens the main menu on the bottom of the screen and pressing again clears it.
SUB
MENU
[SUB MENU]
Pressing this key opens the sub menu on the bottom of the screen and pressing again clears it.
2.2.1 Menu Selection
(1) In order to select each item on the menu, press the numeric key corresponding to it.
(2) In order to change the contents in the item, press the same key used in (1) to select it and press the
ENT
key.
The underlined setting indicates the current one. The display is highlighted when selected. Pressing the
ENT
key confirms the setting.
(3) In order to change the numerical part in the item, press the same key used in (1), enter an appropriate value using the numeric key and press the
ENT
is displayed in a box.
. When numeral value input is enabled, the input part
Note
Press the
CLR
key to clear the input value.
When items are shown on more than one pages, “PREV” and “NEXT” will be displayed on the upper right corner of the screen.
In this case, press the
9
key to display the next menu or the
0
key to display the previous menu. (Format is the same as above.)
Any item in the menu marked with "(STBY)" should be operated after setting the STBY mode by pressing the
TX
STBY
key. (Format is the same as above.)
2 – 13
2.2
2.2.2 Menu List
MAIN
MENU
MAIN MENU
1. RADAR/TRAIL BRILL
2. RR/VRM/EBL BRILL
3. ATA BRILL
4. GRAPHIC DATA BRILL
5. PROCESS
6. IR
7. FLOATING EBL
8. VECTOR
9. GRAPHIC DATA DISP OFF
SUB
MENU
SUB MENU
1. RADAR #1 MENU
2. RADAR #2 MENU
3. RADAR #3 MENU
4. RADAR #4 MENU
5. ATA #1-#2 MENU
6. PLOTTER MENU
7. ATA TRACK MENU
8.
9. INIT SETTING #1-#4 MENU
OWN
TRK
OWN TRACK
1. DELETE OWN TRACK
2. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
GZ
MENU
Without the ATA function
RADAR ALARM
1. FUNCTION
2. RADAR ALARM MODE
3. RADAR SECTOR ZONE
4. RADAR SENSITIVITY LEVEL
5. AUDIBLE RADAR ALARM
GZ
MENU
With the ATA function (Optional)
RADAR ALARM
1. FUNCTION
2. AUDIBLE ATA ALARM
3. ATA SECTOR ZONE
(AUTO ACQ)
Note
●
When items are shown on more than one pages,
“PREV” and “NEXT” will be displayed on the upper right corner of the screen.
●
In this case, press the
9
key to display the next menu or the
0
key to display the previous menu.
(Format is the same as above.)
2 – 14
2
2.2
SUB
MENU
z
RADAR #1
1. TARGET EXPANSION
2. RADAR VIDEO MENU
3. RADAR TRAILS MENU
4. ZOOM
5.
6.
7. DISPLAY COLOR MENU x
RADAR VIDEO
1. VIDEO LATITUDE
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
3. AUTO DR CONT
4. PROCESS SWITCHING
5. PROC SWITCH RANGE c
RADAR TRAILS
1. RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL
2. RADAR TRAILS REF LEVEL
3. RADAR TRAILS REDUCTION
4. RADAR TRAILS PROCESS
5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING m
BACK GROUND
1. RADAR AREA
2. OUTSIDE OF RADAR AREA
.
RADAR COLOR
1. TARGET COLOR
2. RADAR TRAILS COLOR
SUB
MENU
x
RADAR #2
1. GYRO
2. EBL BEARING
3. PARALLEL INDEX LINE
4.
5. CURSOR MENU
6. STERN FLASH
7. KM/NM VRM1
8. KM/NM VRM2 b
CURSOR
1. CURSOR LENGTH
2. FIXED CURSOR
SUB
MENU
c
RADAR #3
1.
2.
3. EPA MENU
4. XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY
5.
6.
7. PERFORMANCE MONITOR c
EPA
1. VECTOR TIME
2. PLOT NUMBER
3. LIMITS
4. AUDIBLE WARNING
5. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
2 – 15
2.2
SUB
MENU
v
RADAR #4
1. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL
2. DELETE OWN TRACK
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
4. DISP OWN TRACK COLOR
5. CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR
.
CHART DISPLAY
1. C-MAP MENU
2. JRC/ERC CARD MENU
3. CONTOUR OF JRC CARD MENU
4. NAV INFORMATION z
(Note)
C-MAP
1. GRID DISPLAY
2. SOUNDING DISPLAY
3. SOUNDING DEPTH UNIT
4. LIGHT SECTORS DISPLAY
5. LIGHT SECTORS DISPLAY LEVEL
6. FILL LAND AREA
2
Note
● This C-MAP menu can be used only in plotter mode (option).
x
JRC CARD
1. FILL LAND AREA
2. ERC DISP REQUEST v
NAV INFO
1. SETTING WPT/CANCELLATION WPT
2. WAYPOINT INPUT
.
DISP NAV INFO
1. DISP WPT
2. DISP WPT / NUMBER COMMENT
3. DISP MARK COLOR / TYPE c
CONTOUR
1. 10M
2. 20M
3. 30M
4. 40M
5. 50M
6. 60M
7. 70M
8. 80M
9. OTHER
.
CLEAR NAV INFO
1. CLEAR MARK COLOR / TYPE
SUB
MENU
b
ATA #1
1. ATA SYMBOL/TARGET DATA
2. VECTOR TIME
3. PAST POSITION
4. PAST POSITION TIME
5. LIMITS
.
ATA #2
1. AUDIBLE WARNING
2. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
3. ATA TEST MENU
4. SIMULATION
SUB
MENU
m
ATA TRACK
1. TRACK FUNCTION
2. TRACK COLOR
3.
4. TRK DISPLAY
5. TRK MEM INTERVAL
.
CLEAR TRACK
1. CLEAR TRACK COLOR
2. CLEAR TRACK NUMBER
3. CARD 2 TRACK DISP c
ATA TEST
1. TEST VIDEO
2. VECTOR CONST
3. VIDEO TD LEVEL
4. VIDEO HIGH LEVEL
5. VIDEO LOW LEVEL
6. GATE SIZE
7. ATA NOISE LEVEL
8. ATA FTC LEVEL
2 – 16
2.2
SUB
MENU
.
INIT SET #1
1.
2. SPEED EQUIPMENT
3. MANUAL SPEED
4. FUNCTION MENU
5. BUZZER VOLUME
6. DRIFT
7.
8.
.
INIT SET #2
1. BEARING ADJUSTMENT
2. RANGE ADJUSTMENT
3. TUNE ADJUSTMENT
4. SETTING OF PRF
5. PM ADJUSTMENT
6. DATA INPUT FORMAT
7. INITIALIZING GPS MENU (STBY)
8. SETTING GPS MENU (STBY)
.
INIT SET #3
1. SHIFT COAST LINE #1
2. SHIFT COAST LINE #2
3. LAT/LON CORRECTION
4. CHART CENTER POSITION
5. DATA/TIME
6.
m
INITIALIZE GPS/GPS STATUS
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. POSITION
2. EXCLUSION SAT
3. GEODETIC
4. ANTENNA HEIGHT
5. FIX MODE
6. DOP LEVEL
7. POSN AVERAGE
8. SEND DATA
9.
,
SETTING DGPS/DGPS STATUS
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. MODE
2. FREQUENCY
3. BAUD RATE (BPS)
4. SET DATA
5. SEND DATA
6.
7.
8.
9.
v
SET FUNC
1. FUNCTION 1 SETTING MENU
2. FUNCTION 2 SETTING MENU
3. FUNCTION 3 SETTING MENU
4. FUNCTION 4 SETTING MENU
.
SET FUNC x -1
1. MODE
2. PROCESS
3. IR
4. AUTO STC/FTC
5. TGT EXPANSION
6. SAVE PRESENT STATE
.
SET FUNC x -2
1. PULSE WIDTH 0.75NM
2. PULSE WIDTH 1.5NM
3. PULSE WIDTH 3NM
4. PULSE WIDTH 6NM
5. PULSE WIDTH 12NM
.
SET FUNC x -3
1. VIDEO LATITUDE
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
3. GAIN OFFSET
4. XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY
5. SMALL BUOY DETECTION
6. AUTO DR CONT
.
SET FUNC x -4
1. RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL
2. RADAR TRAILS REF LEVEL
3. RADAR TRAILS REDUCTION
4. RADAR TRAILS PROCESS
5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING
.
SET FUNC x -5
1. PROCESS SWITCHING
2. PROC SWITCH RANGE
3.
4.
5.
6. INITIALIZE
2 – 17
.
INIT SET #4
1. MAINTENANCE MENU (STBY)
2. DIAGNOSTIC #1 MENU
3. DIAGNOSTIC #2 MENU (STBY) z
MAINTENANCE MENU
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. ANTENNA HIGHT
2.
3. ANTENNA SWITCH
4. PARTIAL MASTER RESET
5. ALL MASTER RESET
6. INTERNAL SETTING to CARD 2
7. CARD 2 to INTERNAL SETTING
8. MEMOLIZE USER SETTING
9. RESTORE USER SETTING z
SENSOR TEST
SAFETY SWITCH
BEARING PULSE (BP)
BEARING PULSE (BZ) x
DIAGNOSTIC 1
1. SENSOR TEST
2. LINE TEST
3. ATA STATUS
4. ROM VERSION
5. ERROR LOGGING
MAG I.
RUNNING TIME
TX TIME x
LINE TEST
NSK
UART 1
UART 2
ATA c
DIAGNOSTIC 2
1. MEMORY TEST (STBY)
2. KEY SWITCH TEST (STBY) z
MEMORY TEST
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. SRAM
2. GRAPHIC RAM
3. FLASH ROM
4. ATA COMMON RAM
5. CARD 1
6. CARD 2 c
ATA STATUS
TRACKING NUMBER
TD INTERRUPT NUMBER
GZ NUMBER
2.2
2 x
KEY SWITCH TEST
0. PREVIOS MENU
KEY
TRACK BALL
VOLUME
SHAFT ENCODER
ROTARY SWITCH
DIPSW1
DIPSW2
Note
●
When items are shown on more than one pages,
“PREV” and “NEXT” will be displayed on the upper right corner of the screen.
●
In this case, press the
9
key to display the next menu or the
0
key to display the previous menu.
(Format is the same as above.)
2 – 18
v
ROM VERSION
MAIN CPU
NSK
ATA CPU
ATA TD b
ERROR LOGGING
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
2.2
SUB
MENU
n
PLOTTER
1. WPT/ROUTE MENU
2. WPT SETTING MENU (STBY)
3. DISP/DEL OF TRK/MARK COLOR MENU
(STBY)
4. CLEAR MEMORY/INIT CARD MENU
(STBY)
5. MEM CAPACITY/COPY MEM MENU
(STBY)
6.
7.
8. PLOTTER SETTING MENU (STBY) z
WPT/ROUTE
1. WAYPOINT ALARM
2. ROUTE ALARM
3. SETTING OF ROUTE SEQUENCE
4. SELECT SCHEDULED ROUTE
5. ROUTE SEQUENCE
6. WPT SWITCH MODE
7. WPT SKIP/BACK SKIP MENU
8. SETTING WPT/CANCELLATION WPT m
WPT SKIP/BACK SKIP MENU
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. WPT SKIP
2. WPT BACK SKIP x
WPT SETTING
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. WAYPOINT ENTRY
2. WAYPOINT INPUT c
DISPLAY/DELETE OR TRACK/MARK
IN DISTINCTION COLOR
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. DISP OWN TRK COLOR
2. DISP MARK COLOR/TYPE
3. CLEAR OWN TRK COLOR
4. CLEAR MARK COLOR/TYPE
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
v
CLEAR MEMORY/INITIALIZE CARD
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. CLEAR MARK/LINE DATA
2. CLEAR WPT/ROUTE DATA
3. FORMAT CARD 2
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
b
MEMORY CAPACITY/COPY MEMORY
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. MEM CAPACITY
2. COPY INSIDE -> CARD 2
3. COPY CARD 2 -> INSIDE
4. COPY CARD 1 -> CARD 2
5. CLEAR FILE -> CARD 2
6. CARD 2 OWN TRACK DISP
7. CARD 2 MARK DISP
8. SHOW CARD 1
9. SHOW CARD 2
,
PLOTTER SETTING
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. SCALE
2. PRESET SCALE
3. VECTOR/NUMBER DISPLY MENU
4. MARK SETTING MENU
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
c
VECTOR/NUMBER DISPLAY
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. SELECT LINE
2. OWN VECTOR LENGTH
3. WPT VECTOR
4. WPT/ROUTE DISPLAY
5. WPT NUMBER DISPLAY
6. RTE NUMBER DISPLAY
7. STATUS OF ORG/DEST
8. SCALEBAR DISPLAY
9.
v
MARK SETTING
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. MARK SIZE
2. MARK FONT
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2 – 19
3
BASIC
OPERATION
3.1
Flow of Operation ················································3-1
3.2
Preparation ···························································3-5
3.3
Basic Operation ·················································3-15
3.4
Using Function Key [FUNC]······························3-62
3.5
Displaying the Chart ··········································3-75
3.6
Displaying Own Ship Track ······························3-79
3.7
Displaying Navigation Information ··················3-89
3.1
Flow of Operation
Turning power on and starting the system
Tuning
Observation and video adjustment
Data acquisition and measurement
Ending operation and stopping the system
Basic operation is explained on the following pages.
3 – 1
3.1.1 Turning Power on and Starting the System
CAUTION
The radar may be damaged if the 100 V AC/200 V AC changeover switch on the back of the indicator is not set in the correct direction according to the ship's power.
3.1
Procedures
1. Check that the ship's power is supplied to the system.
2. Press the power switch to turn the power on.
PWR
The warm-up timer appears on the screen.
3. Press
TX
STBY
.
Radar transmission starts and the scanner unit starts rotating.
"STBY" on the upper left of the screen changes to "TX".
Pressing the
TX
STBY
switch before "STBY" is displayed does not enable radar transmission.
Attention
● Immediately after radar installation, after replacement of the magnetron or if the system has not been operated for a long time, set the system to the standby mode and leave it as it is for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it to the transmit mode.
● When turning power on after power was once turned off, wait 5 min or more after setting the power switch to OFF until setting it to ON again.
● Insufficient warming-up may cause sparks inside the magnetron and may make its oscillation unstable.
Start the transmitting mode with the short-pulse range and then go on to the long-pulse range. If the oscillation becomes unstable during the period, immediately reset the system to the standby mode, leave it as it is for 5 to 10 minutes and restart the system. Repeat this until the system comes to oscillate stably.
3
3 – 2
3.1
3.1.2 Degauss
Procedures
1. Press the
DEGAUSS
key to degauss the screen.
Attention
Use this function only when degaussing is necessary due to misalignment of colors, etc. on the screen.
A sufficient effect can be obtained from one cycle of degaussing. There is no need to perform successive degaussing.
If it is inevitable to perform successive degaussing, wait at least 30 sec after the degassing key was once pressed until that key is pressed again.
3.1.3 Tuning
Procedures
1. Press the
RANGE
key to select any range between 6 and 96/120 nautical miles.
Press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key to decrease the range.
Press the plus (+) side of the
RANGE
key to increase the range.
2. Turn the
AUTO
TUNE
control.
Adjust the video for best presentation.
If radar display doesn't show a weak target, adjust the control until the turning bar on the lower left of the screen indicates the maximum.
To use Auto Tuning mode
AUTO
TUNE
Procedures
1. Press the control.
Exit
Select auto tuning mode, "AUTO" appears on the right of the tuning bar.
AUTO
TUNE
2. Press the control again.
"AUTO" disapears on the right of the tuning bar, changes to manual mode.
3 – 3
3.1
3.1.4 Observation and Video Adjustment
Procedures
1. Press the
RANGE
key to select the range appropriate for observation.
GAIN
BRILL
2. Turn the and controls so that the target is displayed most clearly.
3.1.5 Data Acquisition and Measurement
For details, see section “3.3 Basic Operation” and chapter “4 Measurement”.
3.1.6 Ending Operation and Stopping the System
To stop transmission
Procedures
Press the
TX
STBY
switch.
This stops radar transmission and scanner unit rotation. "TX" on the upper left of the screen changes to "STBY".
Keep the system in the standby mode if it is expected to be reset to the transmit mode soon. This enables the user to select the transmit mode again simply by pressing the
TX
STBY
switch.
To turn off
Procedures
Press the
PWR
switch to turn the system off.
This stops the power to be supplied to the system.
3
3 – 4
3.2
Preparation
3.2.1 Tuning [TUNE]
AUTO
TUNE
This control is used to tune the receiver.
When the tuning does not match, the receiving sensitivity decreases and the operator may miss weak or distant targets.
For manual tuning, adjust the TUNE control so that the target is displayed most clearly. If radar display doesn't show radar return, adjust the control until the tuning bar on the lower left of the screen indicates its maximum right.
Since it takes about ten minutes for the oscillation frequency of the magnetron to stabilize after the transmit mode has been set, adjust the control again 10 minutes later.
3.2.2 Adjusting Sensitivity [GAIN]
GAIN
This control is used to adjust the receiving sensitivity of the radar. Turning it clockwise increases the sensitivity and expands the radar picture observation range. Excessive gain, however, increases receiver noises on the screen and could make target detection more difficult.
When sighting targets densely located on the screen or targets near the own ship, turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the sensitivity. If gain is set too low, weak or distant targets could be missed.
3.2.3 Adjusting CRT Brilliance [BRILL]
BRILL
This control is used to adjust the brilliance of the total screen. Turning it clockwise increases the brilliance.
Adjust it to the best condition for you.
3 – 5
3.2
3.2.4 Suppressing Sea Clutter [SEA]
AUTO
SEA
This control is used to suppress sea clutter. Although turning it clockwise increases the suppressing effect, excessive suppressing could miss weak target at short range.
To use Auto Suppressing Sea Clutter mode
AUTO
SEA
Procedures
1. Adjust the
AUTO
SEA
so that the target is displayed most clearly.
2. Press the control.
Select auto suppressing sea clutter mode, then "STC AUTO" appears on upper right of the screen. Turn the control again when the target is not displayed most clearly.
AUTO
SEA
3. Press the control again.
Exit
"STC AUTO" disappears on the upper right of the screen, changes to manual mode.
Note
● Auto suppressing sea clutter mode can not select with auto suppressing rain and snow clutter mode.
3
3 – 6
3.2
3.2.5 Suppressing Rain and Snow Clutter [RAIN]
AUTO
RAIN
This control is used to suppress rain/snow clutter. Although turning it clockwise enables contours of targets obscured by rain/snow clutter to be seen, excessive suppressing could miss weak targets. It is more effective for suppressing sea clutter to use this control together with the [SEA] control.
Keep the knob at its leftist position for normal operation.
To use Auto Suppressing Rain and Snow Clutter mode
AUTO
RAIN
Procedures
1. Press the control.
Select auto suppressing rain and snow clutter mode, and "FTC AUTO" appears on the upper right of the screen.
AUTO
RAIN
Turn the control when the target is not displayed most clearly.
2. Press the
AUTO
RAIN
control again.
Exit
"FTC AUTO" disappears on the upper right of the screen, and changes to manual mode.
Note
● Auto suppressing rain and snow clutter mode can not select with auto suppressing sea clutter mode.
3 – 7
3.2
3.2.6 Adjusting Brilliance
Procedures
1. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to open the main menu.
Brilliance increases in the four levels as shown below every time each setting key for adjusting brilliance is pressed and pressing it again returns the system to the original status.
z
[RADAR ／ TRACK BRILL]: Adjusts brilliance of radar video.
x
[RR
／ VRM ／ EBL BRILL]: Adjusts brilliance of the fixed range scale, variable range scales (VRMs1 and 2) and electronic cursors (EBLs1 and 2).
c
[ATA BRILL]: Adjusts brilliance of the ATA symbol vector.
It is used to adjust brilliance of the symbol vector of the electronic plot
(EPA) when the ATA is not added (This system mounts the ATA as standard equipment, so this function is usually not available.)
v
[GRAPHIC DATA BRILL]: Adjusts brilliance of the letters outside the fixed bearing range, of the cursor inside the fixed bearing range, of the HL, of the mark line, of the own ship track, of the other ship track, and of the coast line.
Note
●
The red and white marks, lines, and tracks change by "3. ATA BRILL".
By brilliance adjustment of radar videos, only the gamma correction value changes and the maximum brilliance remains unchanged. (The radar signal brilliance of a strong level remains unchanged and the radar signal brilliance of a weak level changes.)
Main menu
MAIN MANU
1. RADAR ／ TRAIL BRILL
2. RR ／ VRM ／ EBL BRILL
3. ATA BRILL
4. GRAPHIC DATA BRILL
5. PROCESS
6. IR
7. FLOATING EBL
8. VECTOR
9. GRAPHIC DATA DISP OFF
●
●
●
●
OFF
OFF
OFF
TRUE
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
PROC1
IR1
ON
RELATIVE
PROC2
IR2
PROC3
IR3
Brilliance, once adjusted, is stored depending on the selected day/night mode (refer to subsection “3.2.7
Selecting DAY
／ NIGHT Modes [DAY ／ NIGHT]”).
Exit 2. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key.
3
3 – 8
3.2
3.2.7 Selecting DAY
／ NIGHT Modes [DAY ／ NIGHT]
Procedures
Press the
DAY
NIGHT
key.
DAY
NIGHT
Pressing this key changes the mode from "DAY1" to "DAY2",
"NIGHT1" to "NIGHT2" in this order.
DAY
NIGHT
DAY
NIGHT
DAY
NIGHT
The brilliance set at the time of selecting each mode is stored. For adjusting brilliance, refer to subsection
“3.2.6 Adjusting Brilliance”.
3 – 9
3.2
3.2.8 Setting Color
This control is used to set the background colors of inside and outside the bearing scale as well as radar and trail video colors in each mode (four modes of DAY1, 2 and NIGHT1 and 2).
The following colors can be set.
Element
BACKGROUND COLOR
Colors that can be set
Black, Blue
(within PPI)
BACKGROUND COLOR
Black, Sky blue
(outside of PPI)
TARGET COLOR Yellow, Green, Orange
RADAR TRAILS COLOR Sky blue, White, Green
Screen display colors can be set and stored independently in each screen color arrangement mode.
Recommended setting
Reduce the brilliance other than radar videos during nighttime to reduce glare.
Brilliance of each element
Daytime setting
Maximum brilliance of
Nighttime setting
Reduce the brilliance of each element (radar video = 2) graphic and distance marker.
Background color Black or Blue (optional) Black
Radar video Yellow Green, Orange
3
3 – 10
3.2
3.2.8.1 Background Color
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
1
key to open the RADAR #1 menu.
3. Press the
7
key to open the BACKGROUND menu.
4. Press the
1
key to select the background color inside the bearing scale. (Radar area)
Two colors, including black, are available.
Press the
1
key to select the color for DAY1 and press the
ENT
key.
Press the
1
key again to select the color for DAY2 and press the
ENT
key.
Select the colors for NIGHT1 and 2 in the same way.
5. Press the
2
key to select the background color outside the bearing scale.
Two colors, including black, are available.
Press the
2
key to select the color for DAY1 and press the
ENT
key.
Press the
2
key again to select the color for DAY2 and press the
ENT
key.
Select the colors for NIGHT1 and 2 in the same way.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Background
BACK
GROUND
1. RADAR AREA
2. OUTSIDE OF RADAR AREA
DAY1:
DAY2:
NIGHT1:
NIGHT2
DAY1:
DAY2:
NIGHT1:
NIGHT2:
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
SKY
SKY
SKY
SKY
0. PREV
9. NEXT
3 – 11
3.2
3.2.8.2 Setting Radar Video and Trails Color
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
1
key to open the RADAR #1 menu.
3. Press the
7
key to open the BACKGROUND menu.
Exit
4. Press the
9
key to open the RADAR COLOR menu.
5. Press the
1
key to select "TARGET COLOR".
Three colors (yellow, green, orange) are available.
Press the
1
key to select the color for DAY1 and press the
ENT
key.
Press the
1
key again to select the color for DAY2 and press the
ENT
key.
Select the colors for NIGHT1 and 2 in the same way.
6. Press the
2
key to select "RADAR TRAILS COLOR".
Three colors (sky, white and green) are available.
Press the
2
key to select the color for DAY1 and press the
ENT
key.
Press the
2
key again to select the color for DAY2 and press the
ENT
key.
Select the colors for NIGHT1 and 2 in the same way.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Radar color
RADAR
COLOR
1. TARGET COLOR
0. PREV
2. RADAR TRAILS COLOR
DAY1:
DAY2:
NIGIHT1:
NIGIHT2:
DAY1:
DAY2:
NIGHT1:
NIGHT2:
YEL
YEL
YEL
YEL
SKY
SKY
SKY
SKY
GRN
GRN
GRN
GRN
WHT
WHT
WHT
WHT
ORN
ORN
ORN
ORN
GRN
GRN
GRN
GRN
3
3 – 12
3.2
3.2.9 Rejecting Radar Interference
Attention
If you'll watch the RADAR BEACON and the SART, set IR as follows.
IR OFF
Procedures
1. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to open the MAIN MENU.
2. Press the
6
key to select "IR".
Exit
3. Press the
6
key to select "OFF", "IR1", "IR2" or "IR3" according to the radar interference status.
"IR1", "IR2" or "IR3" then appears on the upper right of the screen to display the interference rejection circuit operation. "IR3" is most effective for the radar interference.
4. Press the
ENT
key.
5. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key.
Main menu
MAIN MANU
1. RADAR/TRACK BRILL
2. RR/VRM/EBL BRILL
3. ATA BRILL
4. GRAPHIC DATA BRILL
5. PROCESS
6. IR
7. FLOATING EBL
8. VECTOR
9. GRAPHIC DATA DISP OFF
●
●
●
●
OFF
OFF
OFF
TRUE
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
PROC1
IR1
ON
RELATIVE
PROC2
IR2
PROC3
IR3
3.2.10 Adjusting Control Panel Brilliance [PANEL]
Procedures
Brilliance increases in the four levels every time the
PANEL
key is pressed and pressing it again returns the system to the original status.
3 – 13
3.2
3.2.11 Stabilization
Sea Stabilization
Sea stabilization gives correct course and speed through the water.
Heading and Speed inputs from gyro compass and a single axis log (or manually set speed) provide a sea stabilized presentation.
The entire philosophy of Collision Avoidance is based upon knowledge of the heading of other vessels in close quater situations. Only the sea stabilized presentation display the heading of moving targets.
This presentation provides a good display for collision Avoidance.
For the sea stabilization, select "MANUAL", "LOG" or "2AXIS/WT" on subsection “8.5.3.1 Setting Own
Ship Speed Equipment”.
Ground Stabilization
Ground stabilization gives correct course and speed over the ground.
Course Over the Ground (COG) and Speed Over the Ground (SOG) are for information only.
The display can be ground stabilized by input from a position fixing equipment (GPS) or from a dual axis log.
For the ground stabilization, select "GPS" or "2AXIS/BT" on subsection “8.5.3.1 Setting Own Ship Speed
Equipment”.
Note
● Composite mode (R+P) or optional Protter mode provides a ground stabilized presentation by input from a position foxing equipment (GPS).
3
3 – 14
3.3
Basic Operation
Attention
If you'll watch the RADAR BEACON and the SART, set the process as follows.
IR OFF
PROCESS OFF
3.3.1 Using Trackball to Move Cursor "+"
The cursor mark "+" is often used to designate positions in various operations. The cursor mark is interlocked with motions of the trackball. When the trackball is turned vertically and horizontally, the cursor mark also movers vertically and horizontally. The cursor readouts at the lower left of the screen read the distance and the bearing of the cursor.
The operator is recommended to get accustomed to designate positions by using the trackball before operation.
Note
● When the mode of fixed cursor is selected, the cursor is fixed in the direction of the axis selected on the menu. (See subsection “3.3.17 Setting Cross Cursor Length and Fixing Cursor Position”.)
3.3.2 Using EBL (Electronic Cursor) [EBL1
／ EBL2]
The EBL (Electronic Cursor) is absolutely necessary to measure distance and bearing.
The operator is recommended to get accustomed to move the cursor before operation.
EBL1
EBL2
EBL
OFF
3 – 15
3.3
Procedures
Displaying EBL
The EBL currently selected is displayed in a box on the lower left of the screen.
EBL1
EBL2
Pressing the [EBL1
／ EBL2] key once displays (selects) EBL1.
Pressing it again displays (selects) EBL2.
EBL1
EBL2
Clearing EBL
EBL
OFF
Pressing the [EBL OFF] switch once clears the EBL outside a box on the lower left of the screen.
EBL
OFF
Pressing it again clears the other EBL.
Display of Bearing readout of EBL
◎ Bearing readouts of EBL1 and EBL2 currently shown on the radar display are displayed on the lower left of the screen.
Also, EBL1 or EBL2 currently activated is displayed in a box on the lower left of the screen.
Motion of EBL
◎ EBL1
• EBL1 is displayed as a line originating from own ship to outer edge of radar display.
• EBL1 rotates in the same direction as the EBL control.
◎ EBL2
• EBL2 is displayed as a line originating from own ship to outer edge of radar display.
• EBL2 rotates in the same direction as the EBL control.
<When EBL2 is used in the floating EBL mode>
EBL2 can be used as a floating EBL.
– Motion of Floating EBL –
• EBL2 is displayed as a line originating from the cursor mark "+" as it moves.
• The originating point moves in the same direction as the trackball.
• EBL2 rotates in the same direction as the EBL control.
• VRM2 on the EBL2 is displayed as a circle.
When EBL2 is changed to the parallel index line, VRM2 is not displayed.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to open the MAIN MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to select "FLOATING EBL".
Exit
3. Press the
7
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
4. Press the
ENT
key.
5. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key.
3 – 16
3
3.3
Setting EBL Display
Select EBL true and relative bearing display.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
2
key to open the RADAR #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
2
key to select "EBL BEARING".
4. Press the
2
key to select "TRUE" or "RELATIVE" and press the
ENT
key.
Selecting "RELATIVE" displays "R" and selecting "TRUE" displays "T" in the EBL bearing column on the lower left of the screen.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Radar #2
RADAR #2
1. GYRO
2. EBL BEARING
3. PARALLEL INDEX LINE
4.
5. CURSOR MENU
6. STERN FLASH
7. KM
／ NM VRM1
8. KM
／ NM VRM2
0.0
°
TRUE
OFF
OFF
KM
KM
RELATIVE
ON
ON
NM
NM
0. PREV
3 – 17
3.3
3.3.3 Selecting Range Scales [RANGE]
Range scale (nm)
RANGE
12
2
Fixed range ring spacing (nm)
The operator can select various range scale among 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 32, 48, 96 /120
(nm). Press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key to decrease the range or plus (+) side of the
RANGE
key to increase it. The current range in use and the range ring spacing are seen in the upper left of the screen.
3.3.4 Selecting Pulse Width [PL]
PL
The operator can select three pulse widths ( SP (short pulse), MP (medium pulse) and
LP (long pulse) by pressing the
PL
key when the range scale is any of 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6 and 12 nm. The current pulse width is displayed like " MP" on the lower left of the screen. Using the short range increases target resolution and decreases clutter returns. Using the long pulse increases target reception and decreases clutter returns although target resolution also decreases.
3.3.5 Disabling Ship's Head Marker [HL OFF]
HL
OFF
The heading line (HL) showing the course of the own ship is always displayed on the screen. While the
HL
OFF
key is pressed, the HL disappears and targets in the direction of the bow can be observed easily.
In the course-up display mode, pressing this switch returns the to the top of the screen.
◎ When the ship's stern marker (dotted line) is displayed on the screen, the marker also disappears while this key is pressed.
3
3 – 18
3.3
3.3.6 Using Parallel Index Line
The parallel index line is displayed in half area of radar display.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
2
key to open the RADAR #2 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to select "PARALLEL INDEX LINE".
Exit
4. Press the
3
key to select "ON" and press the
ENT
key.
The parallel lines appear on the screen (EBL2 changes to them).
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Cancellation
Press the
3
key in "PARALLEL INDEX LINE" (procedure 4) to select
"OFF" and press the
ENT
key.
The parallel lines disappear and change to EBL2.
Radar #2
RADAR #2
1. GYRO
2. EBL BEARING
3. PARALLEL INDEX LINE
4.
5. CURSOR MENU
6. STERN FLASH
7. KM
／ NM VRM1
8. KM ／ NM VRM2
XXX.X
°
TRUE
OFF
OFF
KM
KM
RELATIVE
ON
ON
NM
NM
0. PREV
3 – 19
3.3
Motion of Parallel Index Line
◎ The parallel index line rotate in the same direction as the EBL control (q and w).
◎ The parallel index line interval can be changed by rotating the VRM control (e and r).
◎ The angle of the parallel index line is displayed in the
EBL2
box on the lower left of the screen.
◎ The interval of the parallel index line is displayed in the VRM2 box on the lower left of the screen.
Display of parallel index line
3
➂
➀
➁
➃
➀
EBL
➁ ➂
VRM
➃
<Changing parallel index line interval>
◎ The bearing and interval of the parallel index lines can be changed in the operation mode of EBL2 or
VRM2 respectively.
3 – 20
3.3
3.3.7 Selecting Presentation Mode [PRESENTATION MODE]
This control switches presentation mode from [Head Up] to [Course Up], [North up] to [Stabilized Course
Up] every time the switch is pressed.
The current presentation mode is displayed as "HUP", "CUP", "NUP" or "SCUP" on the upper right of the screen.
AZI
MODE
The presentation mode that can be used vary according to the motion mode.
See subsection “3.3.8 Selecting True Motion
／Rative Motion Display Modes [TM／RM] [TM RESET]”
.
"HEAD UP"
The heading line (HL) is always pointed vertically to the top center of the radar display (0 degree on the bearing scale). Since targets are displayed in the directions relative to the bow, the operator can sight them on the radar display in the direction he really sees them.
When the own ship traverses, the surrounding targets are rotated at each scan.
"COURSE UP"
Selecting "COURSE UP" places the heading line (HL) on 0 degree on the bearing scale. As in the case of the NORTH UP, stationary targets remain stable on the radar display and the bearing of the HL changes as the own ship changes its course. After the own ship course is changed, the new course can be updated by pressing the switch three more times to select the COURSE UP display or pressing the
HL
OFF
key.
Surrounding targets will not ratate according to the traversing of the own ship.
"NORTH UP"
North is always at the top of the screen (0 degree on the bearing scale). The merits of this presentation mode are as follows: Stationary targets remain stable and can be easily found on the chart, and their true bearings can be read immediately.
Surrounding targets will not ratate according to the traversing of the own ship.
"STABILIZED COURSE UP"
The heading line (HL) is always fixed at the top of the screen (0 degree on the bearing scale) by resetting it every rotation. During video processing, the fixed target is displayed stably and unnecessary targets such as sea clutters decrease. This display is available only in the radar mode.
Surrounding targets will not ratate according to the traversing of the own ship.
North
HL HL HL
North
HL
North-up display Head-up display
3 – 21
Course-up display Stabilized course-up display
3.3
3.3.8 Selecting True Motion
／ Relative Motion Display Modes
[TM
／ RM] [TM RST]
Outline of the Motion Mode
• The "Motion mode" determines in which motion of relative motion or true motion the moving of the own ship and other targets are displayed.
• In "Motion mode", the mode is switched sequentially by pressing the
TM
RM
key.
• In TM/CTM mode, a composite display with plotter is possible, however, in RM/SRM, composite display is not allowed.
RM : Relative motion. The own ship is fixed on the center and other targets are displayed in relative motion.
SRM
A radar trail is relative motion display.
Video processing is performed in relative motion mode. (Video processing cannot be used when H-UP is selected.)
: Stabilized relative motion. The own ship is fixed on the center and other targets are
TM
CTM displayed in relative motion.
A radar trail is relative motion display.
Video processing is performed in true motion mode.
: True motion. The own ship and other targets are displayed in true motion mode on the globe fixed screen.
Video processing is performed in true motion mode.
: True Motion with Constant Own Ship Position. The own ship is fixed on the center and other targets are displayed in relative motion mode.
A radar trail is true motion display.
Video processing is performed in true motion mode.
Note
● For further information about video processing, see subsection “3.3.20 Displaying Video Processing Screen”.
<Display of True Motion (TM)>
The position of the own ship moves with true speed and course across the radar display area. Land masses and other stationary targets do not move and only targets in motion move with true speed and course. When this mode is selected, the own ship position will be offset to a position of about 65% of the radar display area in the opposite direction of the course. The own ship will start moving from the position in accordance with its speed and course. When the own ship arrives at a position of about 65% of the radar display radius on the opposite side, the own ship will automatically be set to the position where it was when the true motion display mode was selected.
Note
● True motion is not activated in the 96 and 120nm ranges.
HL
Fixed on the screen
Moves as the own ship moves.
True Motion Display (TM Display)
3 – 22
3
3.3
To reset own ship position in the true motion display (TM) mode
Press the
T M
RST
key.
The own ship is reset to the position where it was when the true motion mode was selected and will start moving from the position.
Combinations of Presentation Mode and Motion Mode
• The presentation modes that can be used vary according to the motion mode.
RM
SRM
TM
CTM
H-UP
○
○
×
×
N-UP
○
○
○
○
Note
● In H-UP of RM, video processing cannot be used.
C-UP
○
○
○
○
SC-UP
×
×
×
○
Differences Between RM and SRM
• The SRM mode was developed by improving the conventional RM mode to be able to perform accurate video processing.
• When H-UP video processing is performed in the conventional RM mode, videos of other ships may disappear. Since, in SRM mode, video processing is performed by true motion, accurate video processing is performed and problems in the conventional mode do not occur.
Own ship display
Other ships display
Video processing
Radar trail
Off center
RM
Fixed at the center
SRM
Fixed at the center
Relative motion display Relative motion display
Relative motion True motion
Relative motion display Relative motion display
Maximum 66%
Plotter composite display Not possible
Not possible
Not possible
Differences Between TM and CTM
• The CTM modes displays images in TM mode by constantly fixing the own ship at the center.
• Both the CTM and TM modes allow composite display with a plotter.
Own ship display
Other ships display
Video processing
Radar trail
Off center
TM
True motion
True motion display
True motion
True motion display
Maximum 66%
Plotter composite display Possible
CTM
Fixed at the center
Relative motion display
True motion
True motion display
Not possible
Possible
3 – 23
3.3
3.3.9 Changing Own Ship Display Position [OFF CENT]
The
OFF
CENT
key is used to offset own ship in any direction up to 65% of the radar display radius. This function is convenient when watching a direction in a wide range.
This function cannot be used in the range scale of 96 and 120nm.
Procedures
1. Move the cross cursor mark (own ship display position) to a desired position using the trackball (it cannot be moved beyond about 65% of the radar display radius from the center).
2. Press the
OFF
CENT
key.
3. The own ship position moves to the cross cursor mark and is fixed there.
HL
HL
3
Press the
OFF
CENT
Cancellation
Keep pressing the
OFF
CENT
key for a while.
The own ship returns to the center of the radar display area.
3 – 24
3.3
3.3.10
Displaying Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS]
Movements and speeds of other ships can be checked from lengths and directions of their trails as well as synthetic afterglow, which helps avoid collisions of ships. Trail length can be changed over to eight levels of 1min, 3min, 6min, 12min, 15min, 30min, 60min and continuous.
Procedures
1. Press the
TRAILS
key to display the radar trail.
The trail length currently set appears on the upper right of the screen.
Exit
2. Press the TRAILS key.
To Change Radar Trail Interval
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
1
key to open the RADAR #1 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to open the RADAR TRAILS menu.
Exit
4. Press the
1
key to select "RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL".
5. Press the
1
key to select the trail interval and press the
ENT
key.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Radar Trails
RADAR
TRAILS
1. RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL
2. RADAR TRAILS REF LEVEL
3. RADAR TRAILS REDUCTION
4. RADAR TRAILS PROCESS
5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING
1MIN 3MIN
15MIN 30MIN
LEVEL1 LEVEL2
OFF
OFF
OFF
LEVEL1
ON
ON
6MIN 10MIN
60MIN CONT
LEVEL3 LEVEL4
LEVEL2 LEVEL3
0. PREV
HL
3 – 25
Other ship
Trail
3.3
Motion of Radar Trails
◎ When the radar Trails display is turned off, the memory for the Trails which has been displayed is cleared.
◎ The radar Trails memory is also cleared when the TM mode is automatically or manually reset, the range is switched, or the off-center function is used.
◎ In the stabilized course-up display (SCUP) mode, the radar Trails interval "CONT" functions as "12MIN".
Displaying thin or plain radar trails
The items from “2. RADAR TRAILS REF LEVEL” to “5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING” are used to display the thin or plain radar trails.
See the clauses [Page 4] in the section “3.4 Using Function Key [FUNC]”.
3.3.11
Displaying Fixed Range Ring [RR]
This key is used to display fixed range rings. The brilliance of range rings can be charged by subsection
“3.2.6 Adjusting Brilliance”.
Procedures
Press the
RR
key.
A fixed range ring appears on the screen. The interval between rings is displayed on the upper left of the screen.
Cancellation Press the
RR
key again.
The display of the fixed range ring is canceled.
3.3.12
Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1
／ VRM2]
The button is used to display and set variable range markers. Variable range markers are divided into two types: variable range marker 1 which is displayed as a ring made up of long dashes and variable range marker 2 which is displayed as a ring made up of short dashed on dotted line. When EBL2 is displayed,
VRM marks are also displayed on the EBL2.
VRM2
VRM1
VRM2
VRM
OFF
EBL2
VRM1
EBL1
3
3 – 26
3.3
When EBL2 is used in the floating mode
EBL2
VRM1
EBL1
VRM2
Displaying VRM
VRM1
VRM2
VRM1
VRM2
The VRM currently selected is displayed in a box on the lower left of the screen.
Pressing the [VRM1
／VRM2] key once displays (selects) VRM1.
Pressing it again displays (selects) VRM2.
Clearing VRM
VRM
OFF
Pressing the [VRM OFF] switch once clears the VRM outside a box on the lower left of the screen.
Pressing it again clears the other VRM.
VRM
OFF
Bearing Display of VRM
◎ The numerical bearings of VRM1 and VRM2 currently displayed on the PPI is displayed on the lower left of the screen. Also, VRM1 or VRM2 currently activated is displayed in a box above the range data.
Motion of VRM
◎ Variable range markers are displayed around the own ship. Turn the VRM control clockwise to increase the scale or counterclockwise to decrease it.
3 – 27
3.3.13
Using Alarm [ALARM]
In this section the alarm function is explained as the optional ATA unit is not installed.
Guard zones can be set in order to watch out entries of other ships or targets into the Guard zones.
To set radar alarm function
Specify whether to use the function for outputting an alarm using the set Guard zone or not.
Procedures
1. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to open RADAR ALARM menu.
2. Press the
1
key to select "FUNCTION".
Exit
3. Press the
1
key to select "OFF" or "RADAR ALARM".
4. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
5. Press the
GZ
MENU
key.
RADAR ALARM
RADAR
ALARM
1. FUNCTION
2. RADAR ALARM MODE
3. RADAR SECTOR ZONE
4. RADAR SENSITIVITY LEVEL
5. AUDIBLE RADAR ALARM
OFF
IN
1
OFF
2
RADAR ALARM
OUT
3
ON
4
3.3
3
3 – 28
3.3
To set the radar alarm zone
Procedures
1. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to open RADAR ALARM menu.
2. Press the
3
key to select "RADAR SECTOR ZONE".
3. Pressing the
ENT
key clears the menu and displays the radar screen.
4. Turn the EBL and VRM controls to set the radar alarm range and press the
ENT
key.
Use EBL1 to set the originating point of the angle, EBL2 to set the end point of the angle or VRM1 to set the range.
Note
● The width of the radar alarm range is fixed.
Do not use the floating EBL for EBL2 being set.
Motion for radar alarm set zone
◎ There are two modes, namely, "IN" mode in which an alarm goes off when a target enters the set circular radar alarm zone and "OUT" mode in which an alarm goes off when a target goes out of the zone.
◎ The radar alarm set zone is displayed only in the radar transmission mode. Note that it is not displayed in the standby mode.
To set the alarm mode
Specify whether to output an alarm when a target enters or goes out of the radar alarm set zone.
Procedures
1. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to open RADAR ALARM menu.
2. Press the
2
key to select "RADAR ALARM MODE".
Exit
3. Press the
2
key to select "IN" or "OUT".
4. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
5. Press the
GZ
MENU
key.
3 – 29
To set the alarm sound
Specify whether to output alarm sound in case of an alarm or not.
Procedures
1. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to open RADAR ALARM menu.
2. Press the
5
key to select "AUDIBLE RADAR ALARM".
Exit
3. Press the
5
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
4. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
5. Press the
GZ
MENU
key.
To set the alarm detection level
Set the signal level for outputting an alarm.
Procedures
1. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to open RADAR ALARM menu.
2. Press the
4
key to select "RADAR SENSITIVITY LEVEL".
Exit
3. Press the
4
key to select the level between "1" and "4".
4. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
5. Press the
GZ
MENU
key.
3.3
3
3 – 30
3.3
3.3.14
Stopping Alarm
An alarm by characters or buzzer will be generated when any abnormality in input signal or fault in the processing circuit should occur.
When an alarm has been generated, information of errors occurred will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen in turn at intervals of 1 sec.
When the
A L A R M
ACK
key is pressed the error information displayed at that time becomes the object of stopping and then the display of error information will be deleted and the alarm sound will stop.
When there are information of more than one errors, press the
A L A R M
ACK
key for each of the alarms generated.
Information of these error is registered to the error logging in subsection “8.1.2.7 Error Logging”, so it can be checked later.
There are the following types of error information
Type of error
Azimuth pulse error
Bow pulse error
Trigger pulse error
Gyro compass error
Speed information error
Position information error
Video signal error
Fan motor error
Display
ANT (ROTATION)
ANT (HEAD)
TRIGGER
NSK (GYRO), NSK (DATA)
NSK (LOG), NSK (DATA), DLOG (DATA)
NAV (DATA)
VIDEO
FAN
3 – 31
3.3
3.3.15
Setting Alarm Sound Level
Alarm sound levels are set as follows:
To set alarm sound level
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key to open the INIT SET #1 menu.
3. Press the
5
key to select "BUZZER VOLUME".
Exit
4. Press the
5
key to select "OFF", "LOW", "MIDDLE" or "HIGH".
Alarm volume can be set in 3 levels.
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the alarm volume.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Init set #1
INIT
SET #1
1.
2. SPEED EQUIPMENT
3. MANUAL SPEED
4. FUNCTION MENU
5. BUZZER VOLLUME
6. DRIFT SET
DRIFT
7.
8.
MANUAL
0.0KT
OFF
0.0
°
0.0KT
LOG
LOW
GPS
MIDDLE
2AXIS
／ WT
HIGH
0. PREV
9. NEXT
2AXIS
／ BT
3
3 – 32
3.3
3.3.16
Enhancing Target
• Expands a target to the display size.
• By expanding a target, the visibility of a small target is improved, thereby improving the sensitivity.
• However, if a target is expanded, the bearing and distance resolution deteriorate.
• The use of "EXP2" is recommended instead of "EXP1".
• The operation characteristics of the target expansion function are as follows.
OFF : The target expansion function is not used.
Use this mode when a high resolution is required.
EXP1 : Expands the target display size to the distance direction.
Expands also the bearing direction in the center of the screen.
Effective for searching small targets by using Video "PROC3".
Note that the screen may be filled with emphasized noise if Video "PROC2" is used
EXP2
EXP3 concurrently.
: Expands the target display size to the vertical and horizontal directions.
Can be used regardless of the Video processing.
Use this mode when the sea clutter is strong.
: Mode that sets "EXP1" and "EXP2" concurrently.
Use this mode for detecting small targets such as radio buoy.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
1
key to open the RADAR #1 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
1
key to select "TARGET EXPANSION".
4. Press the
1
key to select "OFF", "EXP1", "EXP2" or "EXP3".
Pressing the key selects "EXP1" – "EXP3" and expands the targets on the PPI screen.
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Radar #1
RADAR #1
1. TARGET EXPANSION
2. RADAR VIDEO MENU
3. RADAR TRAILS MENU
4. ZOOM
5.
6.
7. DISPLAY COLOR MENU
OFF
OFF
EXP1
ON
EXP2 EXP3
0. PREV
3 – 33
3.3
3.3.17
Setting Cross Cursor Length and Fixing Cursor Position
This function is used to set the length of the cross cursor or to select the mode for fixing the cursor.
To set the length of the cross cursor
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
2
key to open the RADAR #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
5
key to open the CURSOR menu.
4. Press the
1
key to select "CURSOR LENGTH".
5. Press the
1
key to select "SHORT" or "LONG".
6. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Cursor
CURSOR
1. CURSOR LENGTH
2. FIXED CURSOR
SHORT
X/Y AXIS
LONG
X AXIS Y AXIS
0. PREV
3
3 – 34
3.3
To set the cross cursor fixing mode
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 3 for setting the cursor length to open the CURSOR menu.
2. Press the
2
key to select "FIXED CURSOR".
Exit
3. Press the
2
key to select "X/Y AXES", "X AXIS" or "Y AXIS".
4. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Motion of Fixed Cursor
◎ In order to fix the cursor, press the
Screen display
key.
Pressing the key once fixes the cursor in the direction of the axis selected on the menu.
Pressing it again clears the numerical display of the cursor position.
Pressing it again allows the cursor to move freely.
3 – 35
3.3.18
Displaying Ship's Stern Marker
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
2
key to open the RADAR #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
6
key to select "STERN FLASH".
4. Press the
6
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Radar #2
RADAR #2
1. GYRO
2. EBL BEARING
3. PARALLEL INDEX LINE
4.
5. CURSOR MENU
6. STERN FLASH
7. KM
／ NM VRM1
8. KM ／ NM VRM2
0.0
°
TRUE
OFF
OFF
KM
KM
RELATIVE
ON
ON
NM
NM
0. PREV
3.3
3
3 – 36
3.3
3.3.19
Setting Range Unit in KM
This function is used to switch the range from the own ship to the cursor or the VRM 1/2 range unit to km or nm.
The cursor is selected by VRM1.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
2
key to open the RADAR #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
7
key to select "KM
／ NM VRM1".
In case of VRM2, press the
8
key to select "KM
／ NM VRM2".
4. Press the
7
key to select "KM" or "NM" on VRM1.
In case of VRM2, press the 8 key to select "KM" or "NM" on VRM2.
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key
Radar #2
RADAR #2
1. GYRO
2. EBL BEARING
3. PARALLEL INDEX LINE
4.
5. CURSOR MENU
6. STERN FLASH
7. KM
／ NM VRM1
8. KM
／ NM VRM2
0.0
°
TRUE
OFF
OFF
KM
KM
RELATIVE
ON
ON
NM
NM
0. PREV
3 – 37
3 – 38
3.3
3
3.3
3.3.20
Displaying Video Processing Screen
Attention
● If you'll watch the RADAR BECON and the SART, Set process as follows
PROCESS OFF
● If you'll use this function on RM mode, sellect NORTH-UP bearing or COURSE-UP bearing. This function can't be used on RM mode selected HEAD-UP.
Unnecessary targets are reduced to enhance the intended target(s).
Procedures
1. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to open the MAIN MENU.
2. Press the
5
switch to select "PROCESS".
Exit
3. Press the
5
switch to select "PROC1", "PROC2" or "PROC3".
Selecting "OFF" returns the video to the normal display.
4. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
5. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key.
Motion of Video Processing
• Video processing performs correlation processing for each scan.
• Video processing suppresses random undesired clutter and displays targets only.
• Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary.
• In SRM/TM/CTM mode, high processing precision can be achieved since processing is performed in true motion.
• In RM mode, processing precision deteriorates due to the moving or traversing of own ship since processing is performed in relative motion.
• When a target moves at a high speed and "PROC1" or "PROC2" is used, the image may be blurred or disappear. In this case, set the processing to "OFF" or use "PROC3".
• Operation characteristics of "PROC1" to "PROC3" are as follows:
OFF : Does not perform correlation processing between scans.
At monitoring a near range such as within a bay, monitoring a target moving at a
PROC1
PROC2 high speed, or when a true bearing sensor is not connected.
: Suppresses general undesired clutter and displays targets in natural gradation.
: Suppresses random undesired clutter and displays a target by emphasizing it.
Use this processing for detecting small targets hidden by undesired clutter.
PROC3 : Displays unstable targets of low detection probability.
Use this processing when searching for small targets such as radio buoy in an area free from sea clutter.
3 – 39
Main menu
MAIN MANU
1. RADAR ／ TRACK BRILL
2. RR
／ VRM ／ EBL BRILL
3. ATA BRILL
4. GRAPHIC DATA BRILL
5. PROCESS
6. IR
7. FLOATING EBL
8. VECTOR
9. GRAPHIC DATA DISP OFF
●
●
●
●
OFF
OFF
OFF
TRUE
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
PROC1
IR1
ON
RELATIVE
PROC2
IR2
PROC3
IR3
3.3
3
3 – 40
3.3
3.3.21
Zooming Display
This function is used to display the radar video in the double range scale. The available motion modes are
HUP, CUP and NUP only in the RM mode.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the 1 key to open the RADAR #1 menu.
3. Press the
4
key to select "ZOOM".
4. Press the
4
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Move the cross cursor mark (own ship display position) to your desired position using the trackball (it cannot be moved beyond about 65% of the radar display radius from the center).
7. Press the
ENT
key to zoom display.
Cancellation 8. Press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key or plus (+) side of the
RANGE key.
Radar #1
RADAR #1 0. PREV
1. TARGET EXPANSION
2. RADAR VIDEO MENU
3. RADAR TRAILS MENU
4. ZOOM
5.
6.
7. DISPLAY COLOR MENU
OFF
OFF
EXP1
ON
EXP2 EXP3
3 – 41
3.3
3.3.22
Selecting Display Mode [MAP]
This function is used to select the radar, R+P (radar + plotter) or plotter (optional) mode.
Procedures Press the
MAP
key to select the radar, radar + plotter or plotter mode.
The R+P (radar + plotter) mode cannot be selected unless both GPS and gyro are installed.
The available motion modes in R+P mode are NUP and CUP only in the TM/CTM mode.
The plotter mode cannot be selected unless the plotter is installed and transmission is stopped.
3
3 – 42
3.3
3.3.23
Using Electronic Plot (EPA)
Attention
The EPA is used for a radar without the ATA function.
It stores and displays the target course and speed in the form of vector.
Up to 10 ships (plot No. 0 to 9) can be specified.
It also calculates the CPA and TCPA and outputs an alarm.
The plotting memory is cleared when the power is turned off.
The previous plot is not displayed.
3.3.23.1 Plotting Target
Attention
A vector is displayed by plotting a target twice.
The plot moves according to the course and speed calculated from the two plotted positions.
The plot can be modified.
The plot No. is not displayed when the plot No. display function is turned off.
Procedures
1. Put the cross cursor mark on the target and press the
ACQ
switch to start the first plotting.
2. Enter the plot No. using a numeric key (
0
to
9
).
3. Press the
ENT
key to complete the first plotting.
The acquisition symbol ( ) and the plot No. are displayed at the plotting position.
4. 30 seconds to 15 minutes after the first acquisition, put the cross cursor mark at the position to which the target has been moved and start the second plotting by following procedures 1 to 3 above. For the plot No., input the same one as the first plotting. After the second plotting is completed, the symbol and plot No. displayed after the first plotting is completed are cleared and a symbol (vector) and the plot No. are displayed at the second plotting position.
5. The plot (symbol and plot No.) moves according to the fixed course and speed calculated from the two plotting positions. In this status, the CPA and TCPA at the moving position of the plot are calculated and an alarm is output when the plot enters the alarm range.
3 – 43
3.3
3.3.23.2
Modifying Plot
Attention
This function is used to delete the display of the specified plot.
Until the plot is cleared and reacquired, the plot immediately before moved to the position to be cleared is displayed.
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Enter the plot No. to be modified using a numeric key ( 0 to
9
).
3. Press the
CLR
key.
At this time, the previously-updated status is displayed and "M", standing for "modification", appears near the mark.
4. Put the cross cursor mark at the position to be modified for reacquisition.
At this time, specify the plot No. input in procedure 2.
ACQ
,
0
to
9
,
ENT
3.3.23.3 Deleting Plot
Attention
This function is used to delete the display of the specified plot.
The deleted plot cannot be reproduced.
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key to enable the plot No. to be entered.
2. Enter the plot No. using a numeric key ( 0 to
9
).
3. Press the
TGT
CNCL
key to delete the plot with the specified plot No.
To delete all plots
Procedures
Keep pressing the
TGT
CNCL
key more than 2 seconds.
3
3 – 44
3.3
3.3.23.4 Displaying Plot Numerical Data
Attention
The following data is displayed for the specified plot.
Plot No:
Elapsed time:
Target No.
In 0.1 minute
Target bearing: In 1 degree
Distance to target: In 0.01nm
Target true course: In 1 degree
Target true speed: In 0.1KT
CPA:
TCPA:
In 0.01nm
In 0.1 minute
The TCPA of the plot leaving from the own ship is displayed with "–".
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key to enable the plot No. to be entered.
2. Enter the plot No. using a numeric key ( 0 to
9
).
3. Press the key to display the data of the specified plot.
The symbol of the target whose data is displayed turns to " ".
To delete data display
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Press the key to delete the numerical data.
Note 1
● The vector time and vector mode information are always displayed on the screen.
Note 2
● "U" is displayed near the mark of the target for which the plot has not been updated for more than 10 minutes and an alarm for requesting update goes off.
● The target which has not been updated for more that 15 minutes is automatically deleted.
3 – 45
3.3
3.3.23.5 Plot Symbol
Meanings of Symbols
Vector/symbol
M
Meanings
Safety target
Remarks
Dangerous target
An alarm character (CPA ／ TCPA) appears.
An alarm sounds.
The vector and symbol blink in red.
Initial acquisition mark
Displayed from the first to ten second plotting.
Target whose numerical data is displayed.
The target symbol turns to after the numerical data display is specified.
Plot under modification
Displayed near the symbol whose plot is being modified. The position of the previous plotting is displayed.
Plot update request
U
Trackball cursor mark
Displayed for the plot which has not been updated for 10 minutes. The plot is cleared 5 minutes after if not being updated (the target which has not been updated for 15 minutes is automatically cleared).
In this case, an alarm for requesting update goes off.
Used for manually acquiring or clearing targets and specifying them in the numeral display mode.
3
3 – 46
3.3
3.3.23.6 Setting Vector Display
Attention
This function is used to set the plot display mode (true/relative).
The default setting is the true vector mode.
In the true vector mode, the own ship vector is displayed with a thick line.
The vector mode information is always displayed on the scree.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to open the MAIN MANU.
2. Press the
8
key to select "VECTOR".
3. Press the
8
key to select "TRUE" or "RELATIVE".
4. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting. The vector display changes to the true or relative mode.
5. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key.
or
Procedures
Press the
VECT
TRK
key to select "TRUE" or "RELATIVE".
The vector display changes to the true or relative mode.
Main menu
MAIN MANU
1. RADAR
／ TRACK BRILL
2. RR ／ VRM ／ EBL BRILL
3. ATA BRILL
4. GRAPHIC DATA BRILL
5. PROCESS
6. IR
7. FLOATING EBL
8. VECTOR
9. GRAPHIC DATA DISP OFF
●
●
●
●
OFF
OFF
OFF
TRUE
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
PROC1
IR1
ON
RELATIVE
PROC2
IR2
PROC3
IR3
3 – 47
3.3
3.3.23.7 Setting Vector Time
Attention
This function is used to set the vector length.
The default setting is 6 minutes.
The vector time information is always displayed on the screen.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUBMENU.
2. Press the
3
key to open the RADAR #3 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to open the EPA menu.
4. Press the
1
key to select VECTOR TIME.
5. Press the
1
key to enable the vector time to be entered.
Exit
6. Enter the vector time (0 to 60 minutes) using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
).
7. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
or
Procedures
Press the
VECT+
or
VECT–
key to increase or decrease the vector time every
DEST minute.
EPA
EPA
1. VECTOR TIME
2. PLOT NUMBER
3. LIMITS CPA
TCPA
4. AUDIBLE WARNING
5. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
6MIN (0-60 MIN)
OFF ON
1NM (0.1-9.9 NM. )
15MIN (1-99 MIN)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
0. PREV
3
3 – 48
3.3
3.3.23.8 Displaying
／ Clearing Plot No.
Attention
This function is used to select whether the plot No. is displayed or not.
The plot No. is not displayed at the default setting.
The number is not displayed when "OFF" is selected.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
3
key to open the REDAR #3 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
3
key to open the EPA menu.
4. Press the
2
key to select "PLOT NUMBER".
5. Press the
2
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
6. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
To display or cleare directly
Procedures
Keep pressing the
TGT
DATA
key more than 2 seconds.
EPA
EPA
1. VECTOR TIME
2. PLOT NUMBER
3. LIMITS CPA
TCPA
4. AUDIBLE WARNING
5. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
6MIN (0-60 MIN)
OFF ON
1NM (0.1-9.9 NM. )
15MIN (1-99 MIN)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
0. PREV
3 – 49
3.3.23.9 Setting CPA
／ TCPA
Attention
This function is used to set the CPA/TCPA for detecting danger targets.
The CPA is set in the range between 0.1 to 9.9nm and the TCPA between 1 and 99 minutes.
The default settings are 1.0nm for the CPA and 15 minutes for the TCPA.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
3
key to open the RADAR #3 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to open the EPA menu.
4. Press the
3
key to select "LIMITS".
Exit
5. Press the
3
key to enable the CPA data to be entered.
6. Enter the CPA data using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
).
7. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
The TCPA data becomes enabled to be entered.
8. Enter the TCPA data using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
).
9. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
10. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
EPA
EPA
1. VECTOR TIME
2. PLOT NUMBER
3. LIMITS CPA
TCPA
4. AUDIBLE WARNING
5. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
6MIN (0-60 MIN)
OFF ON
1NM (0.1-9.9 NM. )
15MIN (1-99 MIN)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
0. PREV
3.3
3
3 – 50
3.3
Danger Target Alarm : CPA
／ TCPA
CAUTION
Since an error may be included in an alarm according to the plotting status, the operator himself must finally judge whether evacuation is necessary or not.
This system displays targets in two levels, safe and danger ships, according to the hazard degree. Since the hazard degree can be checked at a glance on the screen, the operator can easily judge to which target he must pay attention.
The classification and contents of the alarms are as follows:
Status
Safety target
Dangerous Target Alarm
Symbol on CRT Alarm character Buzzer
Symbol color :
White
(Not display) (OFF)
Conditions
• CPA > MIN CPA
• 0 > TCPA
• TCPA > MIN TCPA
Dangerous target Symbol color :
Red (Blinking) *
CPA/TCPA
Beeping
Resettable *
• CPA
≤ MIN CPA,
0
≤ TCPA ≤ MIN TCPA
MIN CPA, MIN TCPA : The setting value
* Pressing the
A L A R M
ACK
switch stops an alarm sound and blinking.
3 – 51
3.3
3.3.23.10 Turning Alarm Sound On
／ Off
Attention
This function is used to whether to turn the alarm sound on or off against danger targets.
The sound is turned on at the default setting.
Setting it at "OFF" does not cause the sound to go off although the alarm detecting function remains turned on.
Procedures 1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
3
key to open the RADAR #3 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to open the EPA menu.
4. Press the
4
key to select "AUDIBLE WARNING".
Exit
5. Press the
4
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
6. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
EPA
EPA
1. VECTOR TIME
2. PLOT NUMBER
3. LIMITS CPA
TCPA
4. AUDIBLE WARNING
5. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
6MIN (0-60 MIN)
OFF ON
1NM (0.1-9.9 NM. )
15MIN (1-99 MIN)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
0. PREV
3
3 – 52
3.3
3.3.23.11 Displaying
／ Clearing CPA Ring
Attention
This function is used to select whether the CPA ring is displayed or not.
The ring is displayed at the default setting.
In the true vector mode, the CPA ring is not displayed even when this function is set at "ON".
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
3
key to open the RADAR #3 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to open the EPA menu.
4. Press the
5
key to select "DISPLAY OF CPA RING".
Exit
5. Press the
5
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
6. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
EPA
EPA
1. VECTOR TIME
2. PLOT NUMBER
3. LIMITS
4. AUDIBLE WARNING
CPA
TCPA
5. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
6MIN (0-60 MIN)
OFF ON
1NM (0.1-9.9 NM. )
15MIN (1-99 MIN)
OFF ON
OFF ON
0. PREV
3 – 53
3.3
3.3.24 Displaying Date and Time
The date and time can be displayed only when the GPS is connected.
The date and time can not be displayed when the radar mode is selected.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key three times to open the INIT SET #3 menu.
3. Press the
5
key to select "DATE
／ TIME".
Exit
4. Press the
5
key to select "OFF", "UTC" or "LOCAL" and press the
ENT
key.
The date and time are displayed on the center bottom of the screen.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Init set #3
INIT
SET #3
1. SHIFT COAST LINE #1
2. SHIFT COAST LINE #2
SETTING
N 0.000’
3. LAT ／ LON CORRECTION
E 0.000’
N 0.000’
E 0.000’
4. CHART CENTER POSITION N 0˚ 00.000’
DELETE
5. DATE
6.
／ TIME
E 0˚ 00.000’
OFF UTC LOCAL
0. PREV
9. NEXT
3
3 – 54
3.3
3.3.25
Displaying the Plain Radar Screen
This system has the functions that the screen using auto/manual suppressing sea clutter or rain clutter and the screen using video processing (for further information, see subsection “3.3.20 Displaying Video Processing
Screen”) is more plainer.
Each function can be also set individually by following procedures, but these can be called by pressing the
FUNC
key.
For further information, see “1. VIDEO LATITUDE, 2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION, 6. AUTOMATIC
DR CONTROL (AUTO DR CONT)” of the clauses [Page 3] and “1. PROCESS SWITCHING, 2. PROCESS
(PROC) SWITCH RANGE” of the clauses [Page 5] in section “3.4 Using Function Key [FUNC]”.
1. VIDEO LATITUDE
Select the gradation for displaying received signals on a screen.
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
Eliminates signals that are assumed to be noise and clutter from radar videos.
3. AUTOMATIC DR CONTROL (AUTO DR CONT)
Automatically controls video latitude (dynamic range) when automatic STC or FTC is used.
4. PROCESS SWITCHING
Set a boundary distance and switch the video processing mode to be used between the inside and outside of the boundary.
5. PROCESS (PROC) SWITCH RANGE
Set a boundary distance and switch the video processing mode to be used between the inside and outside of the boundary.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
1
key to open the RADAR #1 menu.
3. Press the
2
key to open the RADAR VIDEO menu.
4. Press the
1
to
5
key to select a setting item.
Exit
5. Press the
1
to
5
key to select a setting value and press the
ENT
key.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
3 – 55
Radar video
RADAR
VIDEO
1. VIDEO LATITUDE
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
3. AUTO DR CONT
4. PROCESS SWITCHING
5. PROC SWITCH RANGE
NARROW
OFF
OFF
OFF
3.0 NM
WIDE
LEVEL1 LEVEL2
ON
ON
0. PREV
3.3
3
3 – 56
3.3
3.3.26 Operation of the Performance Monitor
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to set the radar mode.
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
3. Press the
3
key to open the RADAR #3 menu.
Exit
4. Press the
7
key to select "PAFORMANCE MONITOR".
5. Press the
ENT
key.
Then the Performance Monitor screen will be displayed.
The radar will be set to relative motion (RM), relative display (HUP), off-center DFF, and 24NM range automatically.
The characters and numerals of “Displaying PERFORMANCE MONITOR” and “P.
NON” will blink for approx. 30 sec. When the blinking of the character and numeral of “P. NON” has stopped, use that numeral for checking the receiving power. Further, use the maximum distance of the PM pattern at this time for checking the receiving system.
6. Pressing the
ENT
key.
Note
● When a function mode is used, you cannot use the Performance Monitor.
If you want to use the Performance Monitor, set function mode "OFF" by pressing the
FUNC
key.
3 – 57
3.3
16 ∼18NM
PM pattern
P. MON 6.0
An example of the display of PM pattern
Check of the transmission system
The value of [P. MON] displayed in the lower right corner of the screen represents the transmission power.
If the current values is extremely smaller than the value recorded during the initial check, the transmission system requires inspection by a service engineer.
Checking procedures:
q
Read the current value.
w
Using calibration curve I, obtain the value of relative attenuation d(B) corresponding to the initial value B recorded on the Information Label.
e
Using calibration curve I, obtain the value of relative attenuation d(A) corresponding to A, then d(A)
- d(B) represents the attenuation of the current transmission poser as compared with the initial state.
r
When the attenuation expresses by d(A) - d(B) has exceeded 10 dB (due to the life of the magnetron), the transmission system requires inspection by a service engineer.
16
14
12
10
22 dB
20
18
Calibration Curve I
4
2
8
6
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Bar indication bar length
7 8
PERF. MONITOR
INFORMATION LABEL
DATE
9
The measurement precision
10
P. MON
3 – 58
3
3.3
Example : If it is assumed that initial value B is 8.0 and current value A is 6.0, d(B) = 3.5 dB and d(A) =
7 dB can be obtained from calibration curve I. Therefore, d(A) - d(B) is 3.5 dB, which shows that the current transmission power is a result of approx. 3.5 dB of attenuation.
Example of checking the transmission system
P.MON 6.0
Current value A = 6.0
Initial value B = 8.0
22 dB
20
18
Calibration Curve I
16
14
12
10
8 d (A)
6
3.5dB
4 d (B)
2
A B
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Bar indication bar length
7 8
PERF. MONITOR
INFORMATION LABEL
DATE
'95 1/20
9
The measurement precision
10
P. MON
8.0
3 – 59
3.3
Check of the receiving system
The maximum range of the PM pattern displayed on the screen represents the decrease in sensitivity of the receiving system.
Checking procedures:
q
With regard to the PM pattern displayed on the screen, the maximum range rmax from the PPI center using VRM.
w
Using calibration curve II, decrease in sensitivity corresponding to rmax, R (rmax), then the value of
R (rmax) represents the current decrease in sensitivity of the receiving system.
3
6
4
10
8
16 dB
14
12
Calibration Curve II
2
0
0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (NM)
Maximum range of PM pattern, r max
3 – 60
3.3
Example : If it is assumed that the maximum range of the initial PM pattern, rBmax, recorded in the
Information Label is 16 NM and the maximum range of the current PM pattern, rAmax, is 14
NM, the value of decrease, △r(max) = 5 dB, can be obtained from calibration curve II, which shows that the sensitivity of the receiving system has lowered by approx. 5 dB.
Example of checking the receiving system
P.M.FORM
16NM
P.M.FORM
ABOUT 14NM
16 dB
Calibration Curve II
14
12
R(14)
10
8
PERF. MONITOR
INFORMATION LABEL
∆r
R(16)
6
4
2
0
0 12 13 14 15 16 rAmax rBmax
17 18(NM)
Maximum range of PM pattern, r max
DATE
'95 1/20
P. MON
8.0
3 – 61
3.4
Using Function Key [Func]
3.4.1 Overview
The "Radar function setting" enables users to constantly obtain the optimum radar video by storing the settings of complicated radar signal processing functions in the optimum state for each purpose and calling the required setting according to the use condition.
The contents are set when the radar is delivered from the factory according to the general usage condition.
The setting contents can be adjusted in detail through menu operations.
The following four function modes can be used. The modes are set as follows at delivery from the factory.
Function 1 : COAST
Function 2 : DEEP SEA
Function 3 : BUOY
Function 4 : STORM
Note
● When a function mode is used, you cannot use the Performance Monitor.
If you want to use the Performance Monitor, set function mode "OFF" by pressing
FUNC
key.
3.4.2 Operation Method
(1) Calling a function
• Whenever the
FUNC
key is pressed, the function is switched in the order of Function Off
➝
Function 1
➝ Function 2 ➝ Function 3 ➝ Function 4 ➝ Function Off.
• The name of the function mode that is currently being called is displayed on the top-left corner of the screen.
(2) Changing a Setting (Temporary Change)
• When the setting of the radar signal processing is changed using the MAIN MENU or SUB MENU while one of the functions from Function 1 to Function 4 is called, the change is reflected in the operation state temporarily.
• However, since the stored contents are not changed, the change is cancelled as soon as some other function setting is called. (When the function setting is called again, the operation is set according to the stored contents.)
(3) Changing a Setting (Changing the Stored Contents)
• When changing the stored contents of one of the functions from Function 1 to Function 4, press the
SUB
MENU
,
9
,
4
keys to open the SET FUNC menu and select a required function number.
• The function setting items cover five pages and the pages can be scrolled by using the
0
and
9
keys.
• To store the current operation status in the function number, select "6. SAVE PRESENT STATE" of the function setting item page 1. Use this function when a required setting is found and the status is to be stored.
• To reset the stored contents to the status set at factory delivery, select "6. INITIALIZE" of the function setting item page 5. Use this function when the function changes that were made are too complicated to return to the original state.
3 – 62
3
3.4
3.4.3 Function Setting Items
See below for the menu structure of the function setting items.
Page 1
1. MODE
2. PROCESS
3. IR
4. AUTO STC/FTC
5. TGT EXPANSION
6. SAVE PRESENT STATE
Page 2
1. PULSE WIDTH 0.75NM
2. PULSE WIDTH 1.5NM
3. PULSE WIDTH 3NM
4. PULSE WIDTH 6NM
5. PULSE WIDTH 12NM
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
(Select the name to be used)
OFF
OFF
OFF
PROC1
IR1
PROC2
IR2
AUTO STC AUTO FTC
OFF EXP1 EXP2
PROC3
IR3
EXP3
MP
MP
MP
MP
MP
LP
LP
LP
LP
Page 3
1. VIDEO LATITUDE NORMAL WIDE
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
3. GAIN OFFSET
OFF LEVEL1
± NUMERIC VALUE
4. XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY
NORMAL
5. SMALL BUOY DETECTION OFF
NARROW
LEVEL2
HIPOWER ECONOMY
ON
6. AUTO DR CONT OFF ON
Page 4
1. RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL 1MIN
15MIN
2. RADAR TRAILS REF LEVEL LEVEL1
3. RADAR TRAILS REDUCTION OFF
4. RADAR TRAILS PROCESS OFF
5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING OFF
Page 5
3MIN
30MIN
LEVEL2
LEVEL1
ON
ON
6MIN
60MIN
LEVEL3
LEVEL2
12MIN
CONT
LEVEL4
LEVEL3
1. PROCESS SWITCHING
2. PROC SWITCH RANGE
3.
4.
5.
6. INITIALIZE
OFF ON
NUMERIC VALUE
3 – 63
3.4
3.4.4 Operation Outline of the Function Setting Items
See below for the operation outline of each function setting item.
[Page 1] 1. MODE
• Select the name of the function displayed on the top-left corner of the screen when the function mode is selected.
• When the mode is reset to the mode set at factory delivery, the initial value of the selected mode is called.
• The following eleven modes are available.
COAST : Use this mode for monitoring a comparatively near range where there are many ships such as a bay or a coastal line. (Emphasizes resolution)
DEEP SEA : Use this mode for monitoring a comparatively far range such as open sea.
(Emphasizes a far range sensitivity)
FISH NET : Use this mode for searching for small targets hidden by sea clutter such as net edges.
(Emphasizes sea clutter suppression; the sensitivity of moving target deteriorates slightly)
STORM
CALM
RAIN
: Use this mode when there are many rain/snow clutter or sea clutter due to strong wind and rain. (Emphasizes suppression of rain/snow clutter or sea clutter; the sensitivity deteriorates slightly)
: Use this mode when there are few rain/snow clutters or sea clutter.
BIRD
: Use this mode when there are many rain clouds although the sea clutter is low.
(Emphasizes rain/snow clutter suppression; the sensitivity deteriorates slightly)
: Use this mode for searching a flock of several tens of sea birds flying low at a near range or for searching for a flock of several hundreds of sea birds flying high at a far
LONG
BUOY
USER 1
USER 2 range.
: Use this mode for monitoring a comparatively far range on an open-sea in order to search for small targets.
: Use this mode for searching small targets such as radio buoy outside of the sea clutter. (Displays targets of low detection probability)
: General-purpose mode. Use this mode when the mode is not applicable to any of the nine modes indicated above.
: General-purpose mode. Use this mode when the mode is not applicable to any of the nine modes indicated above.
Page 1
1. MODE
2. PROCESS
3. IR
4. AUTO STC/FTC
5. TGT EXPANSION
6. SAVE PRESENT STATE
(Select the name to be used)
OFF
OFF
OFF
PROC1
IR1
PROC2
IR2
AUTO STC AUTO FTC
OFF EXP1 EXP2
PROC3
IR3
EXP3
3
3 – 64
3.4
[Page 1] 2. PROCESS
• Video processing performs correlation processing for each scan.
• Video processing suppresses random undesired clutter and displays targets only.
• Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary.
• In SRM/TM/CTM mode, high processing precision can be achieved since processing is performed in true motion.
• In RM mode, processing precision deteriorates due to the moving or traversing of own ship since processing is performed in relative motion.
• When a target moves at a high speed and "PROC1" or "PROC2" is used, the image may be blurred or disappear. In this case, set the processing to "OFF" or use "PROC3".
• Operation characteristics of "PROC1" to "PROC3" are as follows:
OFF : Does not perform correlation processing between scans.
PROC1
PROC2
At monitoring a near range such as within a bay, monitoring a target moving at a high speed, or when a true bearing sensor is not connected.
: Suppresses general undesired clutter and displays targets in natural gradation.
: Suppresses random undesired clutter and displays a target by emphasizing it.
PROC3
Use this processing for detecting small targets hidden by undesired clutter.
: Displays unstable targets of low detection probability.
Use this processing when searching for small targets such as radio buoy in an area free from sea clutter.
[Page 1] 3. IR
• Eliminates the interference by radio waves transmitted by other radar equipment.
• The interference elimination effect increases as the number increases such as IR1
➝ IR2 ➝ IR3, however, the sensitivity deteriorates.
• Sensitivity deterioration can be prevented by selecting processing of as smaller number as possible.
• By pressing the [BRILL] control, the transmission repetition frequency can be changed sensitively.
Interference waves can be eliminated effectively by using this function concurrently.
• The interference wave elimination circuit suppresses transceiver noise also. By increasing the processing number, the noise displayed can be reduced. When the maximum sensitivity is required, adjust by turning the [GAIN] control clockwise until a required noise level is displayed.
Page 1
1. MODE
2. PROCESS
3. IR
4. AUTO STC/FTC
5. TGT EXPANSION
6. SAVE PRESENT STATE
(Select the name to be used)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
PROC1
IR1
PROC2
IR2
AUTO STC AUTO FTC
EXP1 EXP2
PROC3
IR3
EXP3
3 – 65
3.4
[Page 1] 4. AUTO STC/FTC
• Detects undesired clutter such as rain/snow clutter and sea clutter and performs suppression processing automatically.
• Performs suppression processing automatically according to the condition even if the sea condition or weather condition changes.
• However, this is not fully automated processing and the user must adjust the degree of remaining undesired clutter.
• Use the [SEA CLUTTER] control for adjustment of the degree of remaining sea clutter.
• Use the [RAIN CLUTTER] control for adjustment of the remaining rain/snow clutter.
• In an area of a low undesired clutter density, undesired clutter may be judged as targets and remain.
Therefore, when using the automatic clutter suppression function, use "PROC1" or "PROC2".
• The operation features of the automatic clutter suppression function are as follows.
OFF : The automatic clutter suppression function is not used.
Use this mode for a bay with low rain/snow clutter or sea clutter or a calm day.
AUTO STC : Detects a sea clutter intensity automatically and performs the optimum sea clutter suppression processing.
The optimum processing effect can be achieved even if the sea clutter intensity varies according to the wind direction.
Since there is no signal attenuation in the area without sea clutter, a land such as an island in which the far range sensitivity is enhanced can be displayed naturally.
However, since this mode recognizes rain clouds in areas outside of the sea clutter range, there is no rain cloud suppression effect.
AUTO FTC : Automatically detects the rain/snow clutter intensity and performs rain/snow clutter suppression processing in addition to automatic STC.
When rain clouds exist sparsely, this mode performs rain/snow clutter suppression processing for the rain cloud area only.
However, since this mode recognizes the land as a rain cloud also, the image of the land becomes weak.
Page 1
1. MODE
2. PROCESS
3. IR
4. AUTO STC/FTC
5. TGT EXPANSION
6. SAVE PRESENT STATE
(Select the name to be used)
OFF PROC1
OFF
OFF
OFF
IR1
AUTO STC
EXP1
PROC2
IR2
AUTO FTC
EXP2
PROC3
IR3
EXP3
3
3 – 66
3.4
[Page 1] 5. TARGET (TGT) EXPANSION
• Expands a target to the display size.
• By expanding a target, the visibility of a small target is improved, thereby improving the sensitivity.
• However, if a target is expanded, the bearing and distance resolution deteriorate.
• The use of "EXP2" is recommended instead of "EXP1".
• The operation characteristics of the target expansion function are as follows.
OFF : The target expansion function is not used.
Use this mode when a high resolution is required.
EXP1 : Expands the target display size to the distance direction.
Expands also the bearing direction in the center of the screen.
Effective for searching small targets by using "PROC3".
Note that the screen may be filled with emphasized noise if "PROC2" is used
EXP2
EXP3 concurrently.
: Expands the target display size to the vertical and horizontal directions.
Can be used regardless of the Video processing.
Use this mode when the sea clutter is strong.
: Mode that sets "EXP1" and "EXP2" concurrently.
Use this mode for detecting small targets such as radio buoy.
Page 1
1. MODE
2. PROCESS
3. IR
4. AUTO STC/FTC
5. TGT EXPANSION
6. SAVE PRESENT STATE
(Select the name to be used)
OFF PROC1
OFF
OFF
OFF
IR1
AUTO STC
EXP1
PROC2
IR2
AUTO FTC
EXP2
PROC3
IR3
EXP3
3 – 67
3.4
[Page 2] 1 to 5. PULSE WIDTH
• Sets a pulse width to be used for the target in each range.
• When the function mode is called, the width is set as the pulse width of the range.
• When a pulse width is changed on the operator panel after the function mode is called, the pulse width is changed temporarily. However, when the device is set to a preparation state or some other function mode is called, the value is reset to the value that is stored.
• Use the SET FUNC menu to change the pulse width to be stored.
• Normally, use "MP". Use "LP" to improve the far range sensitivity, and "SP" to improve the clutter suppression performance due to bad sea or weather condition.
SP : The range resolution is higher than that of "MP".
The clutter suppression performance is higher than that of "MP".
The sensitivity is lower than that of "MP".
MP
LP
: Standard pulse width in the range.
: The sensitivity is higher than that of "MP".
The range resolution is lower than that of "MP".
The clutter suppression performance is lower than that of "MP".
Page 2
1. PULSE WIDTH 0.75NM
2. PULSE WIDTH 1.5NM
3. PULSE WIDTH 3NM
4. PULSE WIDTH 6NM
5. PULSE WIDTH 12NM
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
MP
MP
MP
MP
MP
LP
LP
LP
LP
3
3 – 68
3.4
[Page 3] 1. VIDEO LATITUDE
• Select the gradation for displaying received signals on a screen.
• Use "NORMAL" as the standard condition and select "WIDE" in rainy weather.
• In "NARROW" mode, images of a close range are displayed in strong contrast.
NORMAL : Setting in the standard use.
The display dynamic range varies according to the range.
WIDE
Short range setting > medium range setting > long range setting
: Setting when the radar is used in rainy weather.
The range is approximately doubled from that of "NARROW" in each range.
NARROW : Obtains images of strong contrast by narrowing the dynamic range of a near range.
[Page 3] 2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
• Eliminates signals that are assumed to be noise and clutter from radar videos.
• Select "OFF" when displaying radar videos in analog mode.
• Select "LEVEL1" or "LEVEL2" when suppressing display of noise and clutter.
• Select "LEVEL1" or "LEVEL2" when using "BLUE" as the background color.
OFF : Sets noise elimination to Off and displays all the signal levels.
Displays images in analog signal mode by floating echoes in the noise.
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
: Completely eliminates signals that are assumed to be undesired clutter (noise, rain/ snow).
Displays signals that cannot be definitely defined to be signals or undesired clutter.
: Completely eliminates signals (noise and clutter) that are assumed to be undesired clutter (noise, rain/snow).
Eliminates signals that cannot be definitely defined to be signals or undesired clutter.
Displays signals that can be definitely defined as signals.
Page 3
1. VIDEO LATITUDE NORMAL WIDE
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
3. GAIN OFFSET
OFF LEVEL1
± NUMERIC VALUE
4. XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY
NORMAL
5. SMALL BUOY DETECTION OFF
6. AUTO DR CONT OFF
HIPOWER
ON
ON
NARROW
LEVEL2
ECONOMY
3 – 69
3.4
[Page 3] 3. GAIN OFFSET
• Corrects the sensitivity in the state where the function mode is called.
• Delicate adjustments of sensitivity are necessary to achieve the optimum sensitivity since the noise level that is displayed changes according to the combination of video processing and radar interference processing.
• The gain offset function enables achievement of constant optimum sensitivity without having to operate the [GAIN] control at switching of the function mode by storing the [GAIN] control correction value in each function mode.
• Set the value to "+" to increase the sensitivity.
• Set the value to "-" to reduce the sensitivity.
• For radar interference processing, set the gain offset value to "+" side, since the noise level decreases as the value increases.
• When "PROC1" or "PROC2" is used, set the gain offset value to the "+" side since the noise level decreases.
• When "PROC3" is used, set the gain offset value to "-" side since noise remains on the screen exceeding the image processing threshold value.
• When "TGT EXPANSION" is used, set the gain offset value to the "-" side since noise is emphasized.
[Page 3] 4. TRANSMISSION (XMIT) REPETITION FREQUENCY
• Select one of three transmission repetition frequency types.
• The transmission repetition frequency relates to the sensitivity and power consumption (life span of magnetron).
• When the transmission repetition frequency is high, the sensitivity improves, however, the power consumption also increases, reducing the life span of the magnetron.
• When the transmission repetition frequency is low, the power consumption decreases, increasing the magnetron life span, however, the sensitivity deteriorates.
• The radar trails reduction processing demonstrates the effect when the transmission repetition frequency is "ECONOMY".
NORMAL : Balanced setting for the sensitivity and the life span of the magnetron.
HIPOWER : Hipower setting; use for detecting small targets.
However, the life span of the magnetron is reduced.
ECONOMY : Economy setting. The maximum life span of the magnetron can be increased.
However, the sensitivity deteriorates slightly.
Use this mode at radar trail fine line processing.
When the fales echoes appear by anomalous propagation, using this mode reduces those fales echoes.
See section “6.4 [V] Anomalous Propagation”.
Page 3
1. VIDEO LATITUDE NORMAL WIDE
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
3. GAIN OFFSET
OFF LEVEL1
± NUMERIC VALUE
4. XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY
NORMAL
5. SMALL BUOY DETECTION OFF
NARROW
LEVEL2
HIPOWER ECONOMY
ON
6. AUTO DR CONT OFF ON
3 – 70
3
3.4
[Page 3] 5. SMALL BUOY DETECTION
• In this mode, the signal processing circuit loss is low when small buoy are detected.
OFF
ON
: Normal signal processing setting.
: The radar interference processing circuit is switched to small buoy detection processing.
Low loss IR processing
➝ IR1 of small buoy detection
Normal IR1
➝ IR2 of small buoy detection
Normal IR2
➝ IR3 of small buoy detection
However, the interference elimination performance of low loss IR processing is lower than that of normal IR processing.
[Page 3] 6. AUTOMATIC DR CONTROL (AUTO DR CONT)
• Automatically controls "VIDEO LATITUDE" (dynamic range) when automatic STC or FTC is used.
• At automatic STC, this mode expands the dynamic range only for the area with strong sea clutter and reduces the dynamic range for the area without sea clutter, enhancing the sensitivity.
• At automatic FTC, the mode expands the dynamic range of the area with strong sea clutter and rain/ snow clutter and reduces the dynamic range of other areas, enhancing the sensitivity.
• When automatic FTC is used, land images become weak.
OFF : DR (dynamic range) automatic control is not performed.
The dynamic range (video latitude) is the same setting as that of manual STC.
ON : Performs automatic DR control. (normal setting)
Page 3
1. VIDEO LATITUDE NORMAL WIDE
2. VIDEO NOISE REJECTION
3. GAIN OFFSET
OFF LEVEL1
± NUMERIC VALUE
4. XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY
NORMAL
5. SMALL BUOY DETECTION OFF
6 AUTO DR CONT OFF
HIPOWER
ON
ON
NARROW
LEVEL2
ECONOMY
3 – 71
3.4
[Page 4] 1. RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL
• Specify the radar trail length in minutes.
• The specifiable radar trail lengths are "1MIN", "3MIN", "6MIN", "12MIN", "15MIN", "30MIN",
"60MIN" and "CONT".
• When "CONT" is specified, radar trailing is continued without time control for radar trail length.
[Page 4] 2. RADAR TRAILS REFERENCE (REF) LEVEL
• Select a level of the radar videos required for drawing a radar trail.
• The required radar video becomes high as the number increases such as level 1
➝ level 2 ➝ level 3
➝ level 4.
• Set a high level when a radar trail is created with clutter and noise.
• Set a high level to create a fine radar trail.
• Reduce the level when the radar trail is not continuous.
[Page 4] 3. RADAR TRAILS REDUCTION
• Sets radar trails reduction processing.
• The effect of radar trails reduction processing increases as the number increases such as level 1
➝ level 2
➝ level 3 ➝ level 4, making the radar trail finer.
• Radar trails reduction processing will not weaken radar videos.
• When radar trails reduction processing is used, a high fine line effect can be achieved by setting
"XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY" to "ECONOMY".
OFF
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
LEVEL 3
: Radar trails reduction processing is not performed.
: Performs radar trails reduction processing. (Effect: low)
: Performs radar trails reduction processing. (Effect: middle)
: Performs radar trails reduction processing. (Effect: high)
Page 4
1. RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL 1MIN
15MIN
2. RADAR TRAILS REF LEVEL LEVEL1
3. RADAR TRAILS REDUCTION OFF
4. RADAR TRAILS PROCESS OFF
5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING OFF
3MIN
30MIN
LEVEL2
LEVEL1
ON
ON
6MIN
60MIN
LEVEL3
LEVEL2
12MIN
CONT
LEVEL4
LEVEL3
3
3 – 72
3.4
[Page 4] 4. RADAR TRAILS PROCESS
• Select whether video processing is performed for radar signals to create a radar trail.
• When radar trails process is set to "ON", a radar trail may not be created due to clutter and noise and a radar trail of the target moving at a high speed may not be created.
• When radar trails process is set to "OFF", a radar trail may be created by clutter and noise and a radar trail of the target that moves at a high speed can be created.
OFF
ON
: Video processing is not performed for the radar signals that create a radar trail.
: Video processing is performed for the radar signals that create a radar trail.
[Page 4] 5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING
• Select whether a radar trail is smoothed for display.
• When a radar trail is not continuous, the radar trail is smoothed by connecting the disconnected sections when displayed.
• When radar trail smoothing is used, the radar trails become slightly thicker. Set smoothing to "OFF" to make the radar trail finer.
• Since smoothing processing is performed at the display stage of a radar trail, the radar trail storage data will not be changed. (When smoothing is set to "OFF" after it is set to "ON", the data is reset to the original state immediately.)
OFF
ON
: Radar trails smoothing processing is not performed.
: Radar trails smoothing processing is performed.
Page 4
1. RADAR TRAILS INTERVAL 1MIN
15MIN
2. RADAR TRAILS REF LEVEL LEVEL1
3. RADAR TRAILS REDUCTION OFF
4. RADAR TRAILS PROCESS OFF
5. RADAR TRAILS SMOOTHING OFF
3MIN
30MIN
LEVEL2
LEVEL1
ON
ON
6MIN
60MIN
LEVEL3
LEVEL2
12MIN
CONT
LEVEL4
LEVEL3
3 – 73
3.4
[Page 5] 1. PROCESS SWITCHING
• Set a boundary distance and switch the video processing mode to be used between the inside and outside of the boundary.
• Video processing outside of the boundary is set to "PROC3".
• Video processing inside of the boundary is set to the video processing mode that is set in the menu.
(PROC1 to 3)
• Use the process switching function when "PROC3" is to be used for a far range, however, "PROC2" is to be used inside of the boundary due to the sea clutter at the center such as buoy search.
• Set the process switch range of this function in "2. PROC SWITCH RANGE" of the function setting item page 5.
OFF
ON
: Process switching is not performed.
: Process switching is performed.
[Page 5] 2. PROCESS (PROC) SWITCH RANGE
• Set a boundary distance and switch the video processing mode between the inside and outside of the boundary.
• Set a boundary distance in this item.
• The boundary distance can be set within the range from 0.1 to 25.5nm in 0.1nm units.
• After a menu is selected, the menu screen is cleared and the boundary distance setting screen is displayed.
• Use the [VRM] control to adjust a distance. After determining a distance, press the
ENT
key and define the setting value.
• The storage value of VRM1 becomes the boundary distance value as a result of distance adjustment operation.
[Page 5] 6. INITIALIZE
• Resets the selected function mode settings to the factory delivery state.
• All the settings that were changed in pages 1 to 4 of the SET FUNC menu are lost.
• Use this function to reset to the standard video when the video became unnatural due to too many changes.
Page 5
1. PROCESS SWITCHING
2. PROC SWITCH RANGE
3.
4.
5.
6. INITIALIZE
OFF ON
NUMERIC VALUE
3
3 – 74
3.5
Displaying the Chart
By using the shoredine ROM card made by JRC and ERC card (issued by Maritime Safty Agency), shoreline is displayed both in radar+plotter made and in plotter mode (optional).
By using C-MAP card, shoreline is displayed only in plotter mode (optional).
For displaying C-MAP card, see NDB-33 plotter instruction manual.
3.5.1 Displaying the Shoreline ROM Card Made by JRC
• As the shoreline ROM card is inserted into card slot 1 or card slot 2, the shoreline is displayed automatically.
• The shoreline ROM card can be inserted 2 cards into card slot 1 and 2, but the card in card slot 2 has the card in card slot 1 over.
• The shoreline ROM card made by JRC can't be inserted into card slot with ERC card or C-MAP card.
• As the card is inserted into card slot, the surface of the card is upper side.
the surface of the CARD
INSERT SLOT1 or SLOT2
"2-2" No. $8 : CARD SLOT
Upper : SLOT1
Lower : SLOT2
3 – 75
3.5
3.5.2 Displaying the ERC Card
• As the ERC card is inserted into card slot 1 or card slot 2, the coast line is displayed automatically.
• The ERC card can be inserted 2 cards into card slot 1 and 2.
• The ERC card can't be inserted into card slot 1 and 2 with JRC card or C-MAP card.
• As the card is inserted into card slot, the surface of the card is upper side.
INSERT SLOT1 or SLOT2
"2-2" No. $8 : CARD SLOT
Upper : SLOT1
Lower : SLOT2
3
the surface of the CARD
3 – 76
3.5
3.5.3 Display the JRC Chart
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
4
key to open the RADAR #4 menu.
3. Press the
9
and
2
key to open the JRC CARD menu.
Exit
4. Press the 1 key to select "FILL LAND AREA", and press the 1 key to select "OFF" or "ON", and Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
5. Press the
2
key to select "ERC DISP REQUEST", and press the
2
key to select "OFF" or "ON", and press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
JRC CARD
JRC
CARD
1. FILL LAND AREA
2. ERC DISP REQUEST
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
0. PREV
3 – 77
3.5
3.5.4 Displaying the Contour of the Shoreline ROM Card by JRC
This function is used to display and select depth and color of contour of JRC card.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
4
key to open the RADAR #4 menu.
3. Press the
9
and
3
key to open the CONTOUR menu.
4. Press the numeric keys (
1
to 9 ) to select contour number.
Exit
5. Press the numeric key ( 1 to 9 ) pressed in procedure 4 again, the depth of the contour number is selected.
Enter the depth of the contour number by using numeric key ( 0 to
9
), and press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the numeric key (
1
to
9
) pressed in procedure 4 again, the color of the contour number is selected.
Press the same numeric key (
1
to 9 ) to select color, and press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. By procedure 4 to 6, the depth of contour of JRC card can be selected 8 patterns.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
CONTOUR
CONTOUR
1. 10M
2. 20M
3. 30M
4. 40M
5. 50M
6. 60M
7. 70M
8. 80M
9. OTHER
OFF SKY GRN YEL PNK
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
OFF WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
0. PREV
3
3 – 78
3.6
Displaying Own Ship Track
The own ship track can be displayed only in the R+P (radar + plotter) or plotter mode (option NDB-33). The display is not available in the radar mode.
3.6.1 Changing Track Color [When equipped with the plotter]
White, sky, blue, green, yellow, pink and red are available for the track color. The track is not displayed or stored when "OFF" is selected.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to select R+P or plotter mode.
2. Press the
OWN
TRK
key twice.
Check that the track color is displayed in a box on the bottom of the screen.
COLOR
3. Turn the control to select the track color.
The track is displayed with the selected color.
Note
● If plotter (NDB-33) isn't combined, the track color can be displayed only sky in R+P mode.
3.6.2 Selecting Track Storing Interval
The range and time for storing the track can be selected from 3, 5, 10 and 30 seconds, 1, 3, 5, 10, 30 and 60 minutes, and 1, 3, 5 and 10 nm. Up to 20,000 track (with mark) can be stored.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to select R+P (radar + plotter) or plotter mode.
2. Press the
OWN
TRK
key to open the OWN TRACK menu.
(or press the
SUB
MENU
and
4
keys to open the RADAR #4 menu.)
3. Press the
2
key to select "OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL".
(or press the
1
key on the RADAR #4 menu to select "OWN TRK
MEM INTERVAL".)
4. Press the
2
key to select "3SEC", "5SEC", "10SEC", "30SEC",
"1MIN", "3MIN", "5MIN", "10MIN", "30MIN", "60MIN", "1NM", "3NM", "5NM" or "10NM".
(or press the
1
key on the RADAR #4 menu.)
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
3 – 79
3.6
Exit 6. Press the
OWN
TRK
key.
(or press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the RADAR #4 menu.)
Note
● If plotter (NDB-33) isn't combined, the OWN TRACK menu will not be opened. You will select "OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL" on the RADAR #4 menu.
OWN TRACK
OWN
TRACK
1. DELETE OWN TRACK RED
2. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
10MIN
OFF
30MIN
ON
60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
9. NEXT
10NM
3
RADAR #4
RADAR #4
1. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
2. DELETE OWN TRACK
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
RED
OFF ON
4. DISP OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
5. CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
WHT
WHT
SKY
SKY
BLU
BLU
GRN
GRN
YEL
YEL
PNK
PNK
0. PREV
9. NEXT
10NM
RED
RED
3 – 80
3.6
3.6.3 Stopping Track Storing
This operation is stopped track storing. After stopping storing the track, the track remains displayed although is cleared by enhancing or reducing the screen.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to select R+P (radar + plotter) or plotter mode.
2. Press the
OWN
TRK
key to open the OWN TRACK menu.
(or press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
keys to open the RADAR #4 menu.)
3. Press the
3
key to select "OWN TRACK MEMORY".
(or press the
3
key on the RADAR #4 menu to select "OWN TRACK
MEMORY".)
4. Press the
3
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
Exit
(or press the
3
key on the RADAR #4 menu.)
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
OWN
TRK
key.
(or press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the RADAR #4 menu.)
3 – 81
OWN TRACK
OWN
TRACK
1. DELETE OWN TRACK RED
2. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY OFF ON
9. NEXT
10NM
3.6
3
RADAR #4
RADAR #4
1. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
2. DELETE OWN TRACK
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
RED
OFF ON
4. DISP OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
5. CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
WHT
WHT
SKY
SKY
BLU
BLU
GRN
GRN
YEL
YEL
PNK
PNK
0. PREV
9. NEXT
10NM
RED
RED
3 – 82
3.6
3.6.4 Deleting Track by Color (Using the [COLOR] Control)
Track can be cleared by color. Clearable tracks are limited to those currently displayed on the screen.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to select R+P (radar + plotter) or plotter mode.
2. Press the
OWN
TRK
key to open the OWN TRACK menu.
(or press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
keys to open the RADAR #4 menu.)
3. Press the
1
key to select "DELETE OWN TRACK".
(or press the
2
key to select "DELETE OWN TRACK".)
COLOR
4. Turn the control to select the color.
Exit
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. After the display for confirming deleting appears, press the
ENT
key to delete the track or the
CLR
key to cancel deleting.
7. Press the
OWN
TRK
key.
(or press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the RADAR #4 menu.)
3 – 83
OWN TRACK
OWN
TRACK
1. DELETE OWN TRACK RED
2. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY OFF ON
9. NEXT
10NM
3.6
3
RADAR #4
RADAR #4
1. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
2. DELETE OWN TRACK
3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
RED
OFF ON
4. DISP OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
5. CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
WHT
WHT
SKY
SKY
BLU
BLU
GRN
GRN
YEL
YEL
PNK
PNK
0. PREV
9. NEXT
10NM
RED
RED
3 – 84
3.6
3.6.5 Deleting Track by Color (Using Menu)
The function for clearing tracks by color using menus is available only in the plotter mode.
Among the stored tracks, only those in the specified color can be deleted. The intenal memory can be saved by deleting unnecessary tracks by color.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to select plotter mode.
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
3. Press the
6
key to open the PLOTTER menu.
(or press the
4
key to open the RADAR #4 menu.)
Exit
4. Press the
3
key to open the DISPLAY
／DELETE OF TRACK／MARK
IN DISTINCTION COLOR menu.
5. Press the
3
key to select "CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR".
(or press the
5
key to select "CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR" on the
RADAR #4 menu.)
6. Press the
3
key to select deleting color.
(or press the
5
key on the RADAR #4 menu.)
7. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
8. After the display for confirming deleting appears, press the
ENT
key to delete the track or the
CLR
to cancel deleting.
9. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
3 – 85
3.6
DISPLAY ／ DELETE OF TRACK ／ MARK IN DISTINCTION COLOR
DISPLAY ／ DELETE OF TRACK ／ MARK IN DISTINCTION COLOR
Press an item number key.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. DISP OWN TRK COLOR
2. DISP MARK COLOR
／ TYPE
TYPE
ALL
ALL
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL
X
PNK RED
Y p ~ o
COLOR ALL
3. CLEAR OWN TRK COLOR
4. CLEAR MARK COLOR
／ TYPE
ALL
TYPE ALL
WHT
WHT
SKY BLU GEN YEL PNK RED
SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
X Y p ~ o
COLOR ALL WHT SKY BLU GEN YEL PNK RED
3
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
RADAR #4
RADAR #4
1. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
2. DELETE OWN TRACK RED
OFF ON 3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
4. DISP OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
5. CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK
ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK
0. PREV
9. NEXT
10NM
RED
RED
3 – 86
3.6
3.6.6 Displaying or Hiding Track by Color
The tracks in your desired color can be displayed or hidden. Even when the tracks in your desired color are displayed, those in other colors are not hidden. Selecting "ALL" displays all tracks irrespective of the colors.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to select R+P (radar + plotter) or plotter mode.
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
3. Press the
6
key to open the PLOTTER menu.
(or press the
4
key to open the RADAR #4 menu.)
Exit
4. Press the
3
key to open the DISPLAY
／DELETE OF TRACK／MARK
IN DISTINCTION COLOR menu.
5. Press the 1 key to select "DISP OWN TRK COLOR".
(or press the
4
key to select "DISP OWN TRK COLOR" on the RADAR
#4 menu.)
6. Press the 1 key to select displayed color.
(or press the
4
key to select displayed color on the RADAR #4 menu.)
7. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
3 – 87
3.6
DISPLAY ／ DELETE OF TRACK ／ MARK IN DISTINCTION COLOR
DISPLAY ／ DELETE OF TRACK ／ MARK IN DISTINCTION COLOR
Press an item number key.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. DISP OWN TRK COLOR
2. DISP MARK COLOR
／ TYPE
TYPE
ALL
ALL
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL
X
PNK RED
Y p ~ o
COLOR ALL
3. CLEAR OWN TRK COLOR
4. CLEAR MARK COLOR
／ TYPE
ALL
TYPE ALL
WHT
WHT
SKY BLU GEN YEL PNK RED
SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
X Y p ~ o
COLOR ALL WHT SKY BLU GEN YEL PNK RED
3
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
RADAR #4
RADAR #4
1. OWN TRK MEM INTERVAL 3SEC 5SEC 10SEC 30SEC 1MIN 3MIN
5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 60MIN 1NM 3NM 5NM
2. DELETE OWN TRACK RED
OFF ON 3. OWN TRACK MEMORY
4. DISP OWN TRACK COLOR
ALL
5. CLEAR OWN TRACK COLOR
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK
ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK
0. PREV
9. NEXT
10NM
RED
RED
3 – 88
3.7
Displaying Navigation Information
This function enables to create, display, modify, and delete navigation lines, coast lines, contour lines, navigation marks, and so on.
This function can be used only in R+P mode and plotter mode (option).
3.7.1 Creating the Navigation Information (Navigation Lines)
When creating a navigation line, it is convenient for later references if a destination is created and then making it identifiable by entering the measurement system and the name of navigation information to the comment area for that destination. The navigation line can be created as a line from that destination.
Procedures
To input a destination
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
, and
4
keys in this order to open the NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the
1
key to select "SETTING WPT/CANCELLATION WPT".
3. Press the
1
or
ENT
key.
The menu will disappear and the destination setting screen will be displayed.
4. Move the cursor to the destination using the track ball, input the destination number by numeral keys, and press the
ENT
key.
The destination will be displayed by a symbol and number. (The destination number will not be displayed when the destination comment number display is set to OFF on the navigation information display menu.)
To delete a destination
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
, and
4
keys in this order to open the NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the
1
key to select "SETTING WPT/CANCELLATION WPT".
3. Press the
ENT
key.
The menu will disappear and the destination number will be displayed on the screen.
4. Press numeric key ( 0 to
9
) to input the number and press the
CLR
key.
Or
3 – 89
3.7
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
, and
4
keys in this order to open the NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the
1
key to select "SETTING WPT/CANCELLATION WPT".
3. Press the
ENT
key.
The menu will disappear and the destination number will be displayed on the screen.
4. Move the cursor to the destination number mark and press the
CLR
key.
NAV INFO
NAV INFO
1. SETTING WPT ／ CANCELLATION WPT
2. WAYPOINT INPUT
00
LAT ／ LON
N 0
° 00.000'
E 0
° 00.000'
COMMENT
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺ ａｂｃｄｅｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ
0. PREV
9. NEXT
3
Caution : When the destination is used for setting a navigation line, a message of "Currently Used" will be displayed and it cannot be deleted.
To input comments for the destination
Comments can be input using alphabet characters, numerals, and special characters.
A total of 20 characters can be input in two lines with each 10 charters per line.
Input the number of geodetic datum using the first two characters. (Refer to the list of geodetic data on page 8-37.)
Input an arbitrary name for identification using the third and succeeding characters.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
, and
4
keys in this order to open the NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the
2
key to select "WAYPOINT INPUT", press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key or plus (+) side of the
RANGE
key to select the destination number that was input on the destination input item, and press the
ENT
or
2
key to move to the input item.
3 – 90
3.7
3. Input the latitude of the destination by numeral keys and press the
ENT key. (When not changed, press the
ENT
key alone.)
4. Input the longitude of the destination by numeral keys and press the
ENT
key. (When not changed, press the
ENT
key alone.)
(Switching of North/Sough Longitude and East/West Latitude is effected by the key.)
5. Then the comment input screen appears. Select a character from the list using the track ball and press the
ENT
key to fix it.
6. To input the next character, repeat procedure 5.
(If the
CLR
key is pressed during operation, the immediately preceding character can be deleted. Further, for a space, press the
ENT
key in a position where there is no letter.)
7. To input for a different destination number, repeat procedures 2 to 6.
To create a navigation line
Procedures 1. Press the
MARK
MENU
key to select the mark key on the screen and then select the color using the [COLOR] control.
2. Move the cursor to the start point of the navigation line and press
9 key. (Use the destination input on the destination input item for the start point.)
3. Move the cursor to the next turning point and press the
0
key.
4. Repeat procedure 3.
5. When the end point is reached, press the
0
key and press the
9 key twice.
A navigation line will be drawn.
6. If the cursor is moved to the start point, a turning point, or the end point and the
CLR
key is pressed, the line containing that point will be deleted.
3 – 91
3.7
3.7.2 Creating the Navigation Information (Coast Lines and
Contour Lines)
To create a coast line or contour line, a line is drawn in the similar manner as for the navigation line.
Procedures
1. Press the
MARK
MENU
key to select the mark key on the screen and then select the color using the [COLOR] control.
2. Move the cursor to the start point of the navigation line and press
9 key. (Use the destination input on the destination input item for the start point.)
3. Move the cursor to the next turning point and press the 0 key.
4. Repeat procedure 3.
5. When the end point is reached, press the 0 key and press the
9 key twice.
A navigation line will be drawn.
6. If the cursor is moved to the start point, a turning point, or the end point and the
CLR
key is pressed, the line containing that point will be deleted.
3
3 – 92
3.7
3.7.3 Creating/Deleting the Navigation Information (Navigation
Marks)
Input a navigation mark at an arbitrary position on the radar screen.
- White, sky, blue, green, yellow, pink and red are available for the mark color.
- The following five shapes are available for the mark shape.
- Up to 20,000 marks can be input together with navigation lines.
Procedures
1. Press the
MARK
MENU
key to select the mark on the screen.
2. Move the cursor to the desired position to input the mark.
3. Select the color using the [COLOR] control.
4. Select the desired shape of mark by numerical keys (
4
to
8
) and press the key.
Pressing the
8
key enters each number in the following sequence :
p
➞ q …… o ➞ p ➞ q …… .
5. To delete a mark, move the cursor to the mark and press the
CLR
key.
3 – 93
3.7
3.7.4 Tuning On or Off Display of Destination Marks, Number and Comments
- This function enables to set the display of destination marks to ON and OFF.
- This function enables to set the display of the destination number and comments displayed beside each destination mark to ON and OFF.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
,
4
, and
9
keys in this order to open the DISP NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the 1 key to select "DISP WPT".
3. Press the 1 key to select "OFF" or "ON" and press the
ENT
key.
The display of destination marks can be set to ON/OFF.
4. Press the
2 key to select "DISP WPT NUMBER/COMMENT".
5. Press the
2
key to select "OFF" or "ON" and press the
ENT
key.
The display of destination number/comment can be set to ON/OFF.
DISP NAV INFO
DISP
NAV INFO
1. DISP WPT
2. DISP WPT NUMBER
／ COMMENT
3. DISP MARK COLOR
／ TYPE
TYPE ALL
OFF ON
OFF ON
0. PREV
9. NEXT
X Y p ~ o
COLOR ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
3
3 – 94
3.7
3.7.5 Tuning On or Off Display of Marks and Lines by Specifying
Color or Shapes
- This function enables to display the marks with the desired color and shape. Further, display can be set to
OFF.
- If the marks with the desired color and shape are displayed, the marks with other colors and shapes will not be deleted.
- When "ALL" is selected, marks will all colors and shapes will be displayed.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
,
4
, and
9
keys in this order to open the DISP NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the
3
key to select "DISP MARK COLOR/TYPE".
3. Press the
3
key to select the shape and press the
ENT
key.
(Multiple shapes can be selected.)
The selected mark will be underlined and the marks with the desired shape will be displayed.
4. Press the
3
key over again, then the reverse display moves to colors, so select a color and press the
ENT
key. (Multiple colors can be selected.)
When not displaying the marks, put the already selected mark shape or mark color to reverse display and press the
ENT
key.
DISP NAV INFO
DISP
NAV INFO
1. DISP WPT
2. DISP WPT NUMBER ／ COMMENT
3. DISP MARK COLOR
／ TYPE
TYPE ALL
OFF ON
OFF ON
0. PREV
9. NEXT
X Y p ~ o
COLOR ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
3 – 95
3.7
3.7.6 Deleting a Mark or Line by Specifying a Color or Shape
This function enables to delete the marks of specific colors and shapes from the marks stored.
Unnecessary marks as classified by color and shape can be deleted to save the area in the internal memory.
Procedures
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
,
4
,
9
, and
9
keys in this order to open the CLEAR NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the
1
key to select "CLEAR MARK COLOR/TYPE".
3. Press the 1 key to select the shape, and press the
ENT
key to fix it.
4. Press the 1 key over again to select the color, and press the
ENT key to fix it.
5. When the message to confirm the deletion is displayed, press the
ENT key to delete or press the
CLR
key to cancel.
CLEAR NAV INFO
CLEAR
NAV INFO
1. CLEAR MARK COLOR
／ TYPE
TYPE ALL
0. PREV
X Y p ~ o
COLOR ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
3
3 – 96
3.7
3.7.7 Displaying Geodetic Datum
When displaying navigation information, check if its geodetic datum is the same as that used by the navigation equipment by referring to the comment at the time when the destination was created.
If the geodetic datum does not accord, the navigation information on the radar screen will be displaced, it is important to use the same geodetic datum as that for the navigation equipment.
To look at the geodetic datum and the name of navigation information
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
,
4
,
9
, and
4
keys in this order to open the NAV INFO menu.
2. Press the
2
key to select "WAYPOINT INPUT".
3. To select the destination number at the time when navigation information was created , press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key or plus (+) side of the
RANGE
key to select it.
The first two numerals displayed in the comment section represent the number of geodetic datum characters. (Refer to the list of geodetic data on page 8-37 for the name of geodetic datum.)
4. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to end the operation.
3 – 97
4
MEASUREMENT
4.1
Measurement with Trackball·······························4-1
4.2
Measurement with Fixed Range Rings ··············4-2
4.3
Measurement with Electronic Cursor and Variable Range Marker ································4-3
4.4
Measurement between Two Optional Points of Target ·······························································4-4
4.1
Measurement with Trackball
Procedures
1. Check the picture of targets on the screen.
2. Use the trackball and bring the cursor mark to a target.
The range and bearing of the target is displayed on the lower left of the screen. The range is the one from the own ship.
0
45
°
Target
Cursor
4NM
270 90
Own ship
Trackball
Cursor
Position
45.0
° R
4.000NM
180
Fig. 4.1
4 – 1
4.2
Measurement with Fixed Range Rings
Procedures
Press the
RR
key.
The fixed range rings appear.
Range is judged from the percentage of target to the fixed range ring spacing.
(The fixed range ring spacing is displayed on the upper left of the screen.)
4
4 – 2
4.3
Measurement with Electronic Cursor and Variable Range Marker
Procedures
1. Press the
EBL1
EBL2
key and select display and motion of EBL1.
(See subsection “3.3.2 Using EBL (Electronic Cursor) [EBL1 ／ EBL2]”.)
EBL1 on the lower left is displayed in a box and EBL1 is displayed by a short dashes line on the PPI screen.
2. Turn the EBL control and bring EBL1 to a target.
The bearing of EBL1 is displayed on the lower left of the screen.
The bearing of EBL1 is the one of the target.
3. Press the
VRM1
VRM2
key and select display and motion of VRM1.
(See subsection “3.3.12 Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1 ／ VRM2]”.)
VRM1 on the lower left of the screen is displayed in a box and VRM1 is displayed by a short dashes line on the PPI screen.
4. Turn the VRM control to bring VRM1 indicated by a short dashes line to a target.
The range of VRM1 from the own ship is displayed on the lower left of the screen.
The range of VRM1 is the one from the own ship to the target.
See Fig. 4.2, in which the range from the own ship to the target and the bearing are as follows: Range: 4.0nm, Bearing: 45.0
°
0
45
°
EBL1
Target
4NM
270 90
Own ship
VRM1
EBL1
VRM1
45.0
° R
4.000NM
180
Fig. 4.2
4 – 3
4.4
Measurement between Two Optional Points of Target
Procedures
1. Press the
EBL1
EBL2
key to display EBL1 and to select motion of EBL1.
EBL1 is displayed in a box on the lower left of the screen.
2. Turn the EBL control and bring EBL1 (short dashes line) to Point A.
(See Fig. 4.3.)
2a. Press the
EBL1
EBL2
key to Display EBL2.
2b. Either open Main Menu to select floating EBL mode or press the
F EBL
key on display.
3. Open the main menu to select the floating EBL mode.
EBL2 is displayed in a box on the lower left of the screen.
(See subsection “3.3.2 Using EBL (Electronic Cursor) [EBL1
／ EBL2]”.)
4. Use the trackball and bring the starting point of FEBL to Point A.
5. Turn the EBL control and bring FEBL to the other point (Point B). (See
Fig. 4.3.)
6. Press the
VRM1
VRM2
key to display VRM1 or VRM2 and to select its motion.
(See subsection “3.3.12 Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1
／ VRM2]”.)
When VRM1 is selected, ○ (VRM marker) appears on FEBL2, and when VRM2 is selected, a circle appears there.
7. Turn the VRM control to move the VRM marker on FEBL to Point B.
The range between the two points and the bearing are displayed in the "VRM" and
"EBL" columns on the lower left of the screen.
(When VRM is movable, its range is displayed in the VRM column.)
0
Starting point of EBL2
340
VRM1 marker
EBL1
FEBL2
Point A Point B
3NM
270 90
Own ship
VRM1
4
EBL1
EBL2
VRM1
340.0
° R
90.0
° R
3.000NM
180
Fig. 4.3
4 – 4
5
OPERATIONS
OF ATA
(OPTION)
5.1
Initialization ··························································5-2
5.2
Display Mode ·······················································5-8
5.3
Target Acquisition ···············································5-9
5.4
Displaying the ATA Data ···································5-11
5.5
Data Reading ······················································5-18
5.6
Alarm Display ·····················································5-20
5.7
Erasing an Unnecessary Target ······················· 5-23
5.8
Adjusting Intensity ············································5-24
5.9
Function Check ··················································5-25
5.10 Target Past Track ··············································5-31
5.11 Turning ON and OFF the ATA Display ············· 5-40
5.12 Turning On and OFF the Alarm Sound of
Dangerous and Lost Targets ····························5-41
5.13 Simulation (Checking the ATA according to a PseudoTarget) ············································5-42
CAUTION
Target acquisition and tracking function with ATA are limited as follows:
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic tracking
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent targets during automatic tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 and 0.05 nm. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.03 nm and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or lose part of them. Such swapping or loss of targets may also occur if the picture of the target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or moves very close to land.
[II] Echo Intensity and Tracking Function
Echo intensity and tracking function are mutually related, and if no echo is detected for six scans or more in succession, targets may be lost.
In such a case, it is necessary to help detecting targets by increasing radar gain. If radar gain is increased too much, the radar may detect and track sea clutters and noises as targets and may sound false alarms. In such a case, radar gain should be reduced and noises should be eliminated.
(The target to which 0 to 9 were appended is lost in over 200 scans.)
[III] Influence of Error Sources on Automatic Tracking
The [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] controls on the radar should be properly adjusted so that targets to be acquired and tracked are clearly displayed on the screen. Unless they are properly adjusted, the tracking accuracy reliability will be reduced.
5 – 1
5.1
Initialization
This sub-section explains how to initialize ATA before operation.
5.1.1 Setting Collision Judgment Conditions : SAFE LIMIT
Attention
Values of collision judgment conditions should be properly set according to type of tracking ship, particular waters, weather and sea conditions. (For relations between the judgment conditions and alarms, see section “5.6 Alarm Display”.)
Before operation, be sure to set and check collision judgment conditions.
[I] Setting the CPA LIMIT (distance of safety limit)
／
TCPA LIMIT (time of safety limit)
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5
key the ATA #1 menu.
3. Press the
5
key to select "LIMITS".
4. Press the
5
key.
Exit
5. Press the
0
to
9
keys to enter a numeric value.
6. Press the
ENT
key to fix the CPA LIMIT.
7. Press the
0
to
9
keys to enter a numeric value.
8. Press the
ENT
key to fix the TCPA LIMIT.
9. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
ATA #1
ATA #1
1. ATA SYMBOL
TAGET DATA
2. VECTOR TIME
3. PAST POSITION
OFF ON
OFF ON
5MIN (0-60MIN)
OFF ON
4. PAST POSITION TIME
5. LIMITS CPA
30 SEC 1 MIN 2 MIN 4 MIN
5. 0NM (0.1-9.9NM)
TCPA 15MIN (1-99MIN)
0. PREV
9. NEXT
5 – 2
5
5.1
[II] Displaying the ring of the CPA (range of safety limit)
The CPA ring is displayed only in the relative vector mode. It is not displayed in the true vector mode.
(Refer to subsection “5.4.1 Vector Display”.)
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5 and
9
key to open the ATA #2 menu.
3. Press
2
key to select "DISPLAY OF CPA RING".
4. Press the
2
key and then press the
ENT
key.
Exit
The CPA ring is set to ON. The CPA ring is displayed on the screen. To erase the display of the CPA ring, press the
2
key and
ENT
key again.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
ATA #2
ATA #2
1. AUDIBLE WARNING
CPA ／ TCPA OFF ON
LOST TARGET OFF ON
2. DISPLAY OF CPA RING OFF ON
3. ATA TEST MENU
4. SIMULATION OFF STOP NEAR FAR
0. PREV
5 – 3
5.1
[III] Setting the gate size
The gate indicates "the area where the radar computer monitors a target which is being tracked." When the gate size is too large, the target will not be lost, but the target might swap to another adjacent target.
When the gate size is set to SMALL, target swap is less likely to occur but there is a risk that the target may not be tracked and therefore be lost.
Usually, the gate size is set to "NORMAL".
The gate size should only be set to "SMALL" when there are may tergets close together (for example within the approaches of a port) and the risk of target swap is high.
ATA TEST
ATA TEST
1. TEST VIDEO
2. VECTOR CONST
3. VIDEO TD LEVEL
4. VIDEO HIGH LEVEL
5. VIDEO LOW LEVEL
6. GATE SIZE
7. ATA NOISE LEVEL
8. ATA FTC LEVEL
VDG VDH VDL
7
2 4
1 8
6
NORMAL SMALL
220
214
0. PREV
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
3. Press
9
key to open the ATA #2 menu.
4. Press the
3
key to open the ATA TEST menu.
5. Press the
6
key to select "GATE SIZE".
Exit
6. Press the
6
key to select "NORMAL" or "SMALL".
7. Press the
ENT
key to set the gate size.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
5
5 – 4
5.1
[IV] Activating automatic aquisition
Use the guard zone to automatically acquire ship.
Attention
This function cannot be used simultaneously with the radar alarm function.
Procedures
1. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to open the RADAR ALARM menu.
2. Press the
1
key to select "FUNCTION".
3. Press
1
key to select "ATA ALARM".
4. Press the
ENT
key to set the function.
When changing the setting of the guard zone, set it according to the “[V] Setting the guard zone” described on next page.
Exit 5. Press the
GZ
MENU
key.
Deactivating automatic acquisition
Set OFF or a radar alarm in the operation procedure 3 for deactivating automatic acquisition. The automatic acquisition does not function and only the manual acquisition functions.
The guard zone will disappear from the screen.
5 – 5
5.1
[V] Setting the guard zone
To watch for the invasion of another ship and a target or to automatically acquire another ship which invaded, the guard zone can be set.
RADAR ALARM
RADAR
ALARM
1. FUNCTION
2. AUDIBLE ATA ALARM
3. ATA SECTOR ZONE
(AUTO ACQ)
OFF
OFF
ATA ALARM
ON
Procedures
1. Display the EBL1, EBL2, and first variable range scale.
For the operation method, refer to subsection “3.3.2 Using EBL (Electronic Cursor)
[EBL1
／EBL2]” and subsection “3.3.12 Displaying Variable Range Markers [VRM1
／ VRM2]”. (ATA ALARM must be selected.)
2. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to open the RADAR ALARM menu.
3. Press
3
key to select "ATA SECTOR ZONE".
4. When pressing the
3
key or
ENT
key, the menu will disappear and the radar screen will appear.
5. Align the EBL1, EBL2, and VRM1 to the position where the guard zone is to be set as shown in the following figure and press the
ENT
The shape of the guard zone is set.
(The guard zone width is fixed to 0.5 NM.)
key.
EBL1
VRM1
EBL2
5
The guard zone can be set at an arbitrary position of 0.5 to 32 NM.
6. Press the
GZ
MENU
key to close the display.
5 – 6
5.1
Operation of the guard zone
• If there is a target in the fan-shaped area of the guard zone, an alarm is sounded and the ▽ mark is displayed on the target.
• If the start and end points of the guard zone are within ±3° when creating the guard zone, a circular guard zone is applied.
• The guard zone is displayed only at radar transmission. Note that the guard zone is not displayed at standby.
5.1.2 Automatically Set Mode (at Activation)
Table 5.1 lists the mode that is automatically set at activation.
Table 5.1 Mode Setting at Activation
Mode Names Modes to be Initialized Location of Detailed Explanation of Function
DISPLAY MODE RM (relative motion display) subsection 3.3.8 or 5.2.1
5.1.3 Setting a Range Scale
The ATA function is operated in all range scales, and usually the scale is set to any range of 1.5 to 24 NM according to the sea area to be used.
5 – 7
5.2
Display Mode
5.2.1 Setting the Motion Display Mode [TM
／ RM]
Press the
TM
RM
key to set the motion display mode to either true motion display TM or relative motion display RM. However, the mode is set to RM at activation.
5.2.2 Setting the Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]
Press the
AZI
MODE
key to set the bearing display mode.
5
5 – 8
5.3
Target Acquisition
Attention
For automatic acquisition, please adjust the [SEA] or [GAIN] control properly to prevent pickup such as sea clatter as much as possible.
For the method for target acquisition of this equipment, automatic and manual modes are available, but both modes can be used at the same time.
5.3.1 Automatic Acquisition
0°
Procedures
-45° 45°
0.5NM
3.5NM
Automatic acquisition uses the preset guard zone as a acquisition zone to automatically acquire a target. The guard zone is set arbitrarily.
The target which entered the guard zone is acquired automatically. The [ ▽ ] mark is appended to the acquired target. The mark is moved together with the target and a vector is displayed within one minute. The target within the guard zone is displayed using the ▽ symbol and the target outside the guard zone is displayed with a normal
ATA symbol.
For the setting method, refer to subsection “5.1.1 [V] Setting the guard zone”.
5 – 9
5.3
5.3.2 Manual Acquisition
Attention
When the target which is being tracked has already reached the maximum number of targets and then is manually acquired, the distant target which is becoming more distant from the own ship at the rear is erased.
Procedures
Align the + cursor mark to the target to be acquired and press the ACQ key.
Use both mode
The [ ] mark is appended to the target and a vector is displayed within one minute.
When using automatic acquisition and manual acquisition at the same time, a target to which special attention is to be paid is manually acquired and other targets are automatically acquired. When a new target is entered exceeding the maximum number of targets, the manually acquired target is erased from the target which is becoming more distant from the own ship at the rear if the automatically acquired target is not available. The automatically acquired target is erased sequentially from the rear one. Great advantages are to be able to maintain the manual acquisition function and to automatically acquired a new target, thereby eliminating the need for manually acquired it.
5.3.3 Setting
／ Deleting a Target Number
This function sets ／ deletes a number to ／ from the target which is being tracked.
Setting a target number
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Align the + cursor to the target to which a number is to be assigned and press the
0
to
9
keys, then press the
ENT
key.
The number which was set near a target is displayed.
Note
● When a number which had already been used was specified, an error occurs.
After deleting the number used, set a new number again.
Deleting a target number
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Align the + cursor to the target from which a number is deleted and press the
CLR
key.
Otherwise, press the
0
to
9
keys and specify a number, then press the
CLR
key.
5 – 10
5
5.4
Displaying the ATA Data
5.4.1 Vector Display
Attention
When a target and the own ship were veered or when a new target was acquired, the displayed vector might reach the specified accuracy only when three minutes or more elapsed after acquired or veering.
The vector might contain errors according to the state of tracking even after three minutes or more elapsed.
For the vector which indicates the forecast position of a target, there are two modes of true vector (TRUE) and relative vector (RELATIVE), and each length can arbitrarily be changed from 0 to 60 minutes.
[I] Selecting the vector modes
Select the true vector display/relative vector display using the
MAIN
MENU
key.
Procedures
1. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to open the MAIN MENU.
2. Press the
8
key to select "VECTOR".
3. Press the
8
key to select "TRUE" or "RELATIVE" and then the
ENT
key.
or
1. Press the
VECT
TRK
key.
Whenever it is pressed, TRUE/RELATIVE is changed.
The current vector mode is displayed at the lower right side of the screen. "T_VECT" is displayed for the true vector display and "R_VECT" is displayed for the relative vector display.
Main menu
MAIN MANU
1. RADAR/TRACK BRILL
2. RR/VRM/EBL BRILL
3. ATA BRILL
4. GRAPHIC DATA BRILL
5. PROCESS
6. IR
7. FLOATING EBL
8. VECTOR
9. GRAPHIC DATA DISP OFF
●
●
●
●
OFF
OFF
OFF
TRUE
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
PROC1
IR1
ON
RELATIVE
PROC2
IR2
PROC3
IR3
5 – 11
5.4
(1) True Vector Display
In the true vector mode, the direction of the target vector becomes the length proportional to the true speed of the target true course, length target.
The vector of the own ship is also displayed as shown in the figure.
By using this mode, the motion of ships around the own ship can accurately and easily be grasped.
In this mode, the CPA ring cannot be displayed.
HL
True vector
The relative vector is not displayed.
(2) Relative vector display
The relative vector displays the relative relationship with the own ship instead of displaying the true motion of the target. In other words, the target in which this relative vector faces to the direction of the own ship
(passes through the CPA ring) is dangerous.
In the relative mode, the place where the CPA (closest point of approach) of the target is located can be known at a glance.
HL
The true vector is not displayed.
5
Relative vector
CPA ring
Therefore, each mode can be used properly according to the purpose. For example, the true vector is used to grasp the true motion of the target and the relative vector is used to grasp the closest point of approach of the target.
5 – 12
5.4
[II] Vector Length
The vector length becomes the length proportional to the speed of the target and the length can be switched from 1 to 60 minutes.
The example shown in the following diagram shows the case where the vector length is six minutes, and the vector tip becomes the forecast position after six minutes.
HL
Expected position
(e.g., after 6 minutes)
Current position
Setting the vector length
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
2
key twice to select "VECTOR TIME".
4. Press the
0
to
9
keys to set the time of the vector length.
5. Press the
ENT
key.
The vector time is fixed. The time of the vector is displayed on the lower right of the screen.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
or
Procedures
1. Whenever the
VECT+
key is pressed, the vector time is increased in units of one minute.
2 Whenever the
VECT–
DEST
key is pressed, the vector time is decreased in units of one minute.
5 – 13
ATA #1
ATA #1
1. ATA SYMBOL
TAGET DATA
2. VECTOR TIME
OFF ON
OFF ON
5MIN (0-60MIN)
3. PAST POSITION
4. PAST POSITION TIME
5. LIMITS CPA
OFF ON
30 SEC 1 MIN 2 MIN 4 MIN
5. 0NM (0.1-9.9NM)
TCPA 15MIN (1-99MIN)
0. PREV
9. NEXT
5.4
5
5 – 14
5.4
5.4.2 Past Position Display
Display the position of a target using the
SUB
MENU
key.
Up to four past position can be displayed. The track mode displays the true or relative track together with the vector mode.
The relative vector mode displays the relative track of a target.
The true vector mode displays the true track.
Displaying the past position
Procedures 1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to select "PAST POSITION".
4. Press the
3
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
5. Press the
ENT
key to set the past position.
Setting the past position interval
6. Press the
4
key in the procedure 3 for displaying the past position to select "PAST POSITION TIME".
7. Press the
4
key several times to select "30SEC", "1MIN", "2MIN" or
"4MIN".
8. Press the
ENT
key to set the past position interval.
Exit 9. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
HL
5 – 15
5.4
Fig. 5.1 shows a display example of the screen and Table 5.2 gives an explanation of the symbols on the screen.
Lost target
Guard zone
HL
Dangerous target
Trackball
(Cursor mark)
Past positions
(Changed course)
Target not being tracked
Safety target
Past positions
(Straight course)
Fig. 5.1 EXAMPLE OF SCREEN DISPLAY
(FOR NORTH UP, TRUE VECTOR MODE)
Besides, the fixed
／ variable range marker, EBL, etc. are displayed.
ATA #1
ATA #1
1. ATA SYMBOL
TAGET DATA
OFF ON
OFF ON
2. VECTOR TIME
3. PAST POSITION
5MIN (0-60MIN)
OFF ON
4. PAST POSITION TIME
5. LIMITS CPA
30 SEC 1 MIN 2 MIN 4 MIN
5. 0NM (0.1-9.9NM)
TCPA 15MIN (1-99MIN)
0. PREV
9. NEXT
5
5 – 16
5.4
Table 5.2 Meanings of Symbols
Vectors and Symbols Meanings
Safety target
Dangerous target
Remarks
An alarm character (CPA/TCPA) appears.
An alarm sounds.
The vector and symbol blink (in red).
Initial acquisition mark After the acquisition, this mark is displayed until the vector is displayed.
Target whose data readouts have been displayed.
When the data reading target is designated using the trackball, the symbol of the target will change to and the target ID is displayed. In case of lost targets and dangerous targets, however, and are displayed respectively instead of .
Lost target
(This symbol appears when a target comes not to be tracked for some reason.)
An alarm character (LOST) appears and an alarm sounds. No vector is displayed, and the symbol blinks.
Target which has entered the guard zone
An alarm character (GZ) appears and an alarm sounds. The symbol blinks.
Trackball cursor mark This symbol is used to designate a target when acquiring it by manual, erasing it or displaying its numerical data readouts.
Past positions of target The symbols are displayed only when
“PAST POSITION” is ON. The interval can be set to 30 SEC, 1, 2 or 4 minutes.
5 – 17
5.5
Data Reading
Attention
When a target under tracking or the own ship steers away from the course, or when the radar acquires a new target, its vector may not reach the required accuracy until 3 minutes passes after the acquisition or the change of course. Even 3 minutes later, the vector may include some errors depending on the tracking condition.
5.5.1 Types of Data Readouts to be Displayed
Target Data
Target ID (TARGET)
True bearing (T BRG)
Range (RNG)
True course (T CSE)
True speed (T SPD)
Closes point of approach (CPA)
: ID of target being displayed.
: In units of 1
°
: In units of 0.1 NM
: In units of 1
°
: In units of 0.1 knot
: In units of 0.1 NM
Time to closest point of approach (TCPA) : In units of 1 minute
For the data reading target, the symbol “ ” and the ID are displayed to distinguish it from other targets.
Note
● When the symbol
whose numerical data have been displayed is not found on the screen, the target is outside the screen (the display range).
5
5 – 18
5.5
5.5.2 Displaying Method of Numerical Data Readouts
[TGT DATA]
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Operate the track ball to align the + cursor mark to the target that is to be numerically displayed (target that is being tracked at present) and press the key.
For the target whose ID has already been displayed. Press
0
to
9
keys to enter the number of the target which has already been displayed and press the key.
The numeric data of the specified target are displayed at the lower right side of the screen, a symbol is changed to , and the target ID is displayed near the symbol.
Subsequently, they are continuously displayed until the target is lost and a vector disappears or another target is specified. ("A" is displayed for the target without its number.)
Besides, when specifying the target which is being initially acquired (target to which the [ ] mark is appended), only the true bearing (T BRG) and range (RNG) of the target are displayed until the vector is displayed.
Erasing the numeric data display
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Press the key.
Note
● The cursor must not be positioned on the target.
5 – 19
5.6
Alarm Display
The following alarms are available on the ATA system:
Dangerous target alarm (CPA
／ TCPA)
Guard zone entry alarm (GZ)
Lost target alarm (LOST)
5.6.1 Dangerous Target Alarm : CPA
／ TCPA
CAUTION
Since the alarm may include some errors depending on target tracking situations, the operator should make the final decision for maneuvering the ship by himself.
For the system, targets are divided into two types: safety target and dangerous target . The degree of danger can be easily recognized at a glance of the screen. So, the operator can easily judge which ship he should pay special attention to.
Types of target and alarm are as follows:
Dangerous Target Alarm
Status Symbol on CRT Alarm character Buzzer Conditions
Safety target
○
Symbol color :
White
(Not displayed) (OFF)
• CPA > MIN CPA
• 0 > TCPA
• TCPA > MIN TCPA
Dangerous target Symbol color : Red CPA/TCPA
Blinks *
▲
Beep • CPA ≦ MIN CPA,
Resettable * 0 ≦ TCPA ≦ MIN TCPA
MIM CPA, MIN TCPA : The setting value
* Pressing the
A L A R M
ACK
switch stops an alarm sound and blinking.
5
5 – 20
5.6
5.6.2 Guard Zone Alarm
Attention
It is very important that, when guard zone is set, the radar tuning gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression should be adjusted so that optimum pictures of targets can be displayed on the screen. The guard zone alarm does not occur against targets which the radar does not detect.
The guard zone function sets a ring at a certain distance and issues an alarm when the target was invaded into this ring.
HL
Guard zone
For the setting method of the guard zone, refer to subsection “5.1.1 [V] Setting the guard zone”.
Status
Guard zone alarm
Guard Zone Alarm
Symbol on CRT Alarm character Buzzer
▽
Blinking *
GZ
(Red character)
Intermittent
“beep,”
Resettable *
Conditions
This alarm occurs w h e n a t a r g e t i s located between the ring.
* When pressing the
A L A R M
ACK
switch, an alarm sound is not sounded and the symbol changes to ○ .
5 – 21
5.6
5.6.3 Lost Target Alarm
Attention
Unless radar tuning, gain sea clutter suppression, rain/snow clutter suppression, etc. have been properly adjusted, the lost target alarm is apt to occur.
The LOST TARGET ALARM will occur when a target acquired and having been tracked comes not to be tracked any more for some reason. Typical causes are as follows among others:
• Target echo is very weak.
• The target under tracking is on the other side of the land or a large ship and so the target echo is not returned.
• Target echo has been blurred by sea clutter returns.
HL
LOST TARGET
5
Status
Lost Target Alarm
Symbol on CRT Alarm character Buzzer
Lost target LOST
Blinking *
* Pressing the
A L A R M
ACK
switch stops blinking.
Beep
Resettable
Conditions
The alarm will sound once when a lost target symbol is displayed.
5.6.4 Stopping Alarm
When any of the alarms in subsections “5.6.1” to “5.6.3” is generated, the corresponding alarm information will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
When multiple alarms are generated, their information will be displayed in turn at intervals of 1 sec.
When the
A L A R M
ACK
key is pressed, the alarms to that the highest priority order is given will be selected and their alarm information will be erased and the alarm sound will stop.
The highest priority order will be given to dangerous target alarms followed by guard zone invasion alarms and lost target alarms.
Multiple alarms of the same type, e.g. guard zone invasion alarms, generated simultaneously, will be stopped when the
A L A R M
ACK
key is pressed once.
When system error information is displayed on the lower left corner of the screen, the highest priority will be given to the stopping of that error information.
5 – 22
5.7
Erasing an Unnecessary Target
When the target on which the vector and symbol are displayed needs not to be tracked or when the number of vectors is reduced from the screen to easily see the target, an unnecessary target can be erased one by one.
When acquition is resumed from the beginning for all target, all target can also be erased.
5.7.1 Erasing a Target per Target
Procedures
1. Align the + cursor mark to the target to be erased.
2. Press the
TGT
CNCL
key.
The target vector and symbol disappear and only the radar image remains.
Specifying and erasing a target number
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Press the
0
to
9
keys to specify a target number.
3. Press the
TGT
CNCL
key.
The vector and symbol of the specified target disappear and only the radar image remains.
5.7.2 Erasing All Targets
Attention
When erasing all targets, the tracking of all the targets must be stopped and new automatic or manual acquisition must be resumed. So use this function only when necessary.
Procedures
Continue pressing the
TGT
CNCL
key for two seconds or more.
All vectors and symbols are erased.
5 – 23
5.8
Adjusting Intensity
Procedures
1. Press the
MAIN
MENU
key.
2. Press the
3
key to select "ATA BRILL".
3. Whenever the
3
key is pressed, the intensity is increased at four stages as shown in the following stages.
These preset types of intensity are stored according to the DAY
／ NIGHT mode.
MAIN MENU
MAIN MANU
1. RADAR ／ TRAIL BRILL
2. RR ／ VRM ／ EBL BRILL
3. ATA BRILL
4. GRAPHIC DATA BRILL
5. PROCESS
6. IR
7. FLOATING EBL
8. VECTOR
9. GRAPHIC DATA DISP OFF
●
●
●
●
OFF
OFF
OFF
TRUE
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
[DAY1]
PROC1
IR1
ON
RELATIVE
PROC2
IR2
PROC3
IR3
5
5 – 24
5.9
Function Check
5.9.1 Vector Constant Setting (ATA)
Do not change the set point carelessly.
Attention
The vector constant is generally set to 7. If the constant is set to a larger value, target vectors can be followed up easily when targets or the own ship change(s) their or its course or speed. On the contrary, the vector accuracy is degraded.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
9
key to open the ATA #2 menu.
4. Press the
3
key to open the ATA TEST menu.
5. Press the
2
key twice to select "VECTOR CONST".
6. When changing the vector constant, use the data entry key to enter the value to be changed and fix this setting using the
ENT
key.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
ATA TEST
ATA TEST
1. TEST VIDEO
2. VECTOR CONST
3. VIDEO TD LEVEL
4. VIDEO HIGH LEVEL
5. VIDEO LOW LEVEL
6. GATE SIZE
7. ATA NOISE LEVEL
8. ATA FTC LEVEL
VDG VDH VDL
7
2 4
1 8
6
NORMAL SMALL
220
214
0. PREV
5 – 25
5.9
5.9.2 Video Level Setting
Do not change the set point carelessly.
Attention
The video level is for deciding the minimum input signal level for the ATA’s target detection circuit.
The video level can be set to the range from 1 to 63.
Unless the level is set to a proper value, the acquiring and tracking functions of ATA will be degraded.
Setting the video TD level
The video TD level is the signal level of target acquisition in the guard zone. As the setting value is smaller, a weaker echo is acquired.
If the setting is too small, the echo is acquired even due to the sea clutter returns. In that case, increase the setting value.
Procedures
1. Set RANGE: 3 NM
TUNE:
GAIN:
Optimum
Maximum
SEA CLUTTER: Optimum
RAIN CLUTTER: Optimum .
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
3. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
4. Press the
9
key to open the ATA #2 menu.
5. Press the
3
key to open the ATA TEST menu.
6. Press the
3
key twice to select "VIDEO TD LEVEL".
7. When changing the setting value of the video level, press the
0
to
9
keys to enter the value of the video level and press the
ENT key to fix this setting.
5
5 – 26
5.9
Exit
Determining the setting value
Set the range to 3 to 6 miles and increase the video level watching the test video on the screen. Then check the video level in which the test video (VDG) is not issued due to noise. Finally, set the video level to a larger value by 4 or 5 than the video level that was checked in the above operation procedure as an appropriate video level so that the test video cannot be issued due to noise. For example, when the video level is 20, set 20 + 4 =
24 as an optimum video level.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Noise
Target
Noise
Target
Test videos (VDG) caused by sea clutter or noise appear.
ATA TEST
ATA TEST
1. TEST VIDEO
2. VECTOR CONST
3. VIDEO TD LEVEL
4. VIDEO HIGH LEVEL
5. VIDEO LOW LEVEL
6. GATE SIZE
7. ATA NOISE LEVEL
8. ATA FTC LEVEL
VDG VDH VDL
7
2 4
1 8
6
NORMAL SMALL
220
214
Test videos are seen only far away from targets.
0. PREV
5 – 27
5.9
Setting the video HIGH level
The video HIGH level is a signal level used for tracking a target in the near distance.
As the setting value is smaller, the target with a weaker signal becomes easy to track, but if it is too small, the sea clutter return and the like are tracked.
Procedures
1. Press the
4
key twice in the procedure 6 of “Setting the video TD level” to select "VIDEO HIGH LEVEL".
2. Press the
0
to
9
keys to enter the value of the video level and
Exit press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Setting the video LOW level
The video LOW level is a signal level used for tracking a target in the far distance. When a weak target in the far distance is difficult to track, decrease the setting value.
When the level is increased exceedingly, the noise is tracked.
Procedures
1. Press the
5
key twice in the procedure 6 of “Setting the video TD level” to select "VIDEO LOW LEVEL".
2. Press the
0
to
9
keys to enter the value of the video level and
Exit press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
5
5 – 28
5.9
5.9.3 Checking the ATA Operation
ATA test video
For the target which is being acquired or tracked, it can be inspected that video signals are normally input to the target detection circuit and processed.
Procedures
1. Set RANGE: 3 NM
TUNE: Optimum
GAIN: Maximum
SEA CLUTTER: Optimum
RAIN CLUTTER: Optimum .
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU
3. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
4. Press the
9
key to open the ATA #2 menu.
5. Press the
3
key to open the ATA TEST menu.
6. Press the
1
key to select "TEST VIDEO".
7. Press the
1
key and then press the
ENT
key to select "VDH".
Confirm that the test video is displayed on the PPI screen at 0.1 mile far in the distance direction from the actual image and a target is tracked.
When the test video is not displayed and the target is tracked, the setting of the video level is assumed to be inappropriate and the fault of the ATA target detection circuit PC4403 is assumed.
(Usually, use VDH to execute the test video.)
Test video
Actual picture
Exit 8. Press the
ENT
key.
The test video disappears.
5 – 29
ATA TEST
ATA TEST
1. TEST VIDEO
2. VECTOR CONST
3. VIDEO TD LEVEL
4. VIDEO HIGH LEVEL
5. VIDEO LOW LEVEL
6. GATE SIZE
7. ATA NOISE LEVEL
8. ATA FTC LEVEL
VDG VDH VDL
7
2 4
1 8
6
NORMAL SMALL
220
214
0. PREV
5.9
5
5 – 30
5.10
Target Past Track
Target past track function cannot be used in the radar mode.
Use it in the composite mode (a plotter option is required.)
Setting the composite mode
Procedures
When pressing the
MAP
key, the mode sequentially changes into the radar mode, composite mode (R+P), and plotter mode (the NDB-33 plotter option is provided).
The composite mode is selected.
Attention
The past track of a target which is tracked by the ATA is stored and displayed.
The tracking target with its target number (Other ship's track number) is set so that target past track can be displayed.
5.10.1
Setting Target Past Track Function
Attention
Setting this function to ON stores and displays up to 10 target past tracks.
Setting it to OFF does not store and display target past track.
If target past track is not erased, this function holds the storage of target past track even while it is set to OFF.
Procedures 1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to open the ATA TRACK menu.
Exit
3. Press the
1
key to select "TRACK FUNCTION".
4. Press the
1
key to select "OFF" or "ON".
5. Press the
ENT
key.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the ATA TRACK menu.
5 – 31
5.10
ATA TRACK
ATA TRACK 0. PREV
9. NEXT
1. TRACK FUNCTION
2. TRACK COLOR
OFF ON
ALL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OTHER
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED WHT WHT WHT WHT
3.
4. TRK DISPLAY ALL 0 1
5. TRK MEM INTERVAL OFF 10SEC
2 3
30SEC
4
1MIN
5 6
3MIN
7 8
5MIN
9 OTHER
10MIN
5.10.2
Specifying Target Past Track
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON.
It can specify up to 10 target past tracks.
Even when target past track is released, the tracking of a target is continued.
Specifying target past track
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Press the
0
to
9
keys to enter target past track ID.
3. Align the + cursor to the target being tracked for which target past track is not displayed and press the
ENT
key.
Releasing target past track
Procedures
1. Press the
TGT
DATA
key.
2. Align the + cursor to the target being tracked for which target past track specification is to be released and press the
CLR
key.
Besides, use the
0
to
9
keys to enter target past track number to be released and press the
CLR
key.
5
5 – 32
5.10
5.10.3
Setting Target Past Track Color
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON.
Seven colors (white, sky, blue, green, yellow, pink, and red) are used to specify individual target past tracks (duplicate colors allowed).
If all colors are specified, the color that is individually set to target past track numbers 0 to 9 is invalidated.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to open the ATA TRACK menu.
Exit
3. Press the
2
key to select "TRACK COLOR".
4. Press the
2
key to select target past track number.
5. Turn the [COLOR] control to select a color.
6. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
The color of target past track with the specified target past track number is switched to a new setting.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the ATA TRACK menu.
ATA TRACK
ATA TRACK 0. PREV
9. NEXT
1. TRACK FUNCTION
2. TRACK COLOR
ALL
OFF ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OTHER
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED WHT WHT WHT WHT
3.
4. TRK DISPLAY ALL 0 1
5. TRK MEM INTERVAL OFF 10SEC
2 3
30SEC
4
1MIN
5 6
3MIN
7 8
5MIN
9 OTHER
10MIN
5 – 33
5.10
5.10.4
Setting Target Past Track Display
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON.
This function continues storing target past track irrespective of this setting.
It sets the display
／ non-display of target past track (up to 10 target) with the specified target past track number.
If all are set, the display
／non-display of the track that is individually set to target past track numbers
0 to 9 are invalidated.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to open the ATA TRACK menu.
3. Press the
4
key several times to select "TRK DISPLAY".
Exit
4. Press the
4
key to select target past track number.
5. Press the
ENT
key for fix this setting.
The display
／non-display of target past track with the specified target past track number is switched. (The item indicated by an underline is displayed.)
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the ATA TRACK menu.
ATA TRACK
ATA TRACK 0. PREV
9. NEXT
1. TRACK FUNCTION
2. TRACK COLOR
ALL
OFF ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OTHER
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED WHT WHT WHT WHT
3.
4. TRK DISPLAY ALL 0 1
5. TRK MEM INTERVAL OFF 10SEC
2 3
30SEC
4
1MIN
5 6 7
3MIN
8
5MIN
9 OTHER
10MIN
5
5 – 34
5.10
5.10.5
Setting the Storage Interval
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON.
Setting this function to OFF does not store target past track. In this case, the display of target past track is continued until the screen is rewritten by changing the range, etc.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to open the ATA TRACK menu.
Exit
3. Press the
5
key to select "TRK MEM INTERVAL".
4. Press the
5
key to select an interval.
5. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the ATA TRACK menu.
ATA TRACK
ATA TRACK 0. PREV
9. NEXT
1. TRACK FUNCTION
2. TRACK COLOR
ALL 0 1
OFF
2 3
ON
4 5 6 7 8 9 OTHER
WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED WHT WHT WHT WHT
3.
4. TRK DISPLAY ALL 0 1
5. TRK MEM INTERVAL OFF 10SEC
2 3
30SEC
4
1MIN
5 6
3MIN
7 8
5MIN
9 OTHER
10MIN
5 – 35
5.10
5.10.6
Erasing the Storage of Target Past Track by Specifying a Color
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON.
This function erases the storage of target past track with the specified target past track color.
The erased target past track is not reproduced.
Erasing target past track
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to open the ATA TRACK menu.
3. Press the
9
key to open the CLR TRACK menu.
4. Press the
1
key to select "CLEAR TRACK COLOR".
5. Press the
1
key to select target past track color.
Exit
6. When pressing the
ENT appear.
key, the confirmation display of erase will
7. Press the
ENT
key to erase the storage of target past track.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the CLR TRACK menu.
Canceling erase
Press the
CLR
key instead of the
ENT
key in the operation procedure
7 of erasing target past track to stop the erase of target past track.
CLR TRACK
CLR TRACK
1. CLEAR TRACK COLOR
2. CLEAR TRACK NUMBER
3. CARD 2 TRACK DISP
0. PREV
ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
ALL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OTHER
0
5
5 – 36
5.10
5.10.7
Erasing the Storage of Target Past Track by Specifying a Number
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON.
This function erases the storage of target past track with the specified target past track number.
The erased target past track is not reproduced.
Erasing target past track
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to open the ATA TRACK menu.
3. Press the
9
key to open the CLR TRACK menu.
4. Press the
2
key to select "CLEAR TRACK NUMBER".
5. Press the
2
key to select the confirmation display of erase.
Exit
6. When pressing the
ENT appear.
key , the confirmation display of erase will
7. Press the
ENT
key to erase the storage of target past track.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to close the CLR TRACK menu.
Canceling erase
Press the
CLR
key instead of the
ENT
key in the operation procedure
7 for erasing target past track to stop the erase of target past track.
CLR TRACK
CLR TRACK
1. CLEAR TRACK COLOR
2. CLEAR TRACK NUMBER
3. CARD 2 TRACK DISP
0. PREV
ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
ALL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OTHER
0
5 – 37
5.10
5.10.8
Reading Taget Past Track from Card 2
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON and is set in the composite mode and plotter mode.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to open the ATA TRACK menu.
3. Press the
9
key to open the CLR TRACK menu.
4. Press the
3
key to select "CARD 2 TRACK DISP".
5. When pressing the
3
key, input of a file number is enabled.
6. Press the
0
to
9
keys to enter a file number.
Exit
7. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
The track with the specified file number is displayed.
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key close the CLR TRACK menu.
CLR TRACK
CLR TRACK
1. CLEAR TRACK COLOR
2. CLEAR TRACK NUMBER
3. CARD 2 TRACK DISP
0. PREV
ALL WHT SKY BLU GRN YEL PNK RED
ALL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OTHER
0
5
5 – 38
5.10
5.10.9
Writing Target Past Track to Card 2
Attention
This setting is valid when target past track function is ON and is set in the composite mode and plotter mode.
Write target past track by entering 4-digit file number that is not stored on the memory card.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
6
key to open the PLOTTER menu.
3. Press the
5
key to select "MEM CAPACITY
／ COPY MEM MENU".
4. Insert the memory card to the slot of card 2.
5. Press the
2
key twice to select "COPY INSIDE
→ Card 2".
6. Press the
0
to
9
keys to enter a 4-digit file number.
7. Press the
ENT
key.
Exit
8. For writing confirmation, press the
ENT
key to execute writing.
To stop writing, press the
CLR
key for the writing confirmation.
9. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
5 – 39
5.11
Turning ON and OFF the ATA Display
For the target which is acquired or tracked, this function sets the display ／non-display of the ATA symbol and numeric data.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
3. Press the
1
key to select "ATA SYMBOL/TARGET DATA".
4. Press the
ATA symbol.
1
key to select the display "OFF" or "ON
" regarding the
5. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
6. Press the
1
key to select the display "OFF" or "ON
" regarding target
data.
7. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
Exit 8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Note
● The vector time and vector mode information are always displayed on the screen.
ATA #1
ATA #1
1. ATA SYMBOL
TAGET DATA
2. VECTOR TIME
3. PAST POSITION
4. PAST POSITION TIME
5. LIMITS
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
5MIN (0-60MIN)
OFF ON
30 SEC 1 MIN 2 MIN 4 MIN
CPA 5. 0NM (0.1-9.9NM)
TCPA 15MIN (1-99MIN)
0. PREV
9. NEXT
5
5 – 40
5.12
Turning On and OFF the Alarm Sound of
Dangerous and Lost Targets
When the target which is acquired or tracked was changed to a dangerous target or when the target failed in tracking and was lost, this function sets the ON
／ OFF of an alarm sound to be generated.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
3. Press the
9
key to open the ATA #2 menu.
4. Press the
1
key to select "AUDIBLE WARNING".
5. Press the
1
key to select the display "OFF" or "ON
" of an AUDIBLE
WARNING regarding a dangerous target.
6. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
7. Press the 1 key to select the display "OFF" or "ON
" of an AUDIBLE
WARNING regarding a lost target.
8. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
Exit 9. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
ATA #2
ATA #2
1. AUDIBLE WARNING
CPA ／ TCPA OFF ON
LOST TARGET OFF ON
OFF ON 2. DISPLAY OF CPA RING
3. ATA TEST MENU
4. SIMULATION OFF STOP NEAR FAR
0. PREV
5 – 41
5.13
Simulation
(Checking the ATA according to a Pseudo Target)
To check the ATA, this function displays a pseudo target on the screen.
Procedures
1. Set GAIN to the minimum.
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
3. Press the
5
key to open the ATA #1 menu.
4. Press the
9
key to open the ATA #2 menu.
5. Press the
4
key to select "SIMULATION".
6. Press the
2
key to select "OFF", "STOP", "NEAR" or "FAR.
7. Press the
ENT
key to fix this setting.
The radar image will disappear, a pseudo target is displayed in the zero degree direction, and the XX character will appear under the screen.
Exit
8. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
A target is displayed in 3 miles for STOP, 4 miles for NEAR, and 2 miles for FAR.
Selecting OFF returns to the normal radar image.
ATA #2
ATA #2
1. AUDIBLE WARNING
CPA
／ TCPA
OFF ON
LOST TARGET OFF ON
2. DISPLAY OF CPA RING OFF ON
3. ATA TEST MENU
4. SIMULATION OFF STOP NEAR FAR
0. PREV
5
5 – 42
6
TRUE AND FALSE
ECHOES
ON DISPLAY
6.1
Radar Line-of-sight Range ··································6-1
6.2
Strength of Reflection from Target ····················6-3
6.3
Sea Clutters ··························································6-3
6.4
False Echoes ························································6-3
6.5
Display of Radar Transponder ··························· 6-6
6.1
The role of the radar operator is to analyze pictures on the screen and to help maneuvering the ship as much as possible.
For the purposes, the operator have to fully understand the merits and demerits of the radar before observing the screen.
To analyze pictures on the screen, it is important to get many experiences of comparing targets in sight with their pictures on the screen by operating the radar on sunny days.
The radar is mainly used to monitor courses of the own ship and other ships in open sea, to check buoys and other navigation marks when entering ports, to measure own ship position in coastal waters on the chart to take distances to and bearings of land and island and to observe positions and motions of targets appeared on the screen in heavy rain. Explanations on radar screen will follow hereunder:
6.1
Radar Line-of-sight Range
Radar wave has the characteristic to propagate along the curved surface of the earth. This characteristic varies with the character of air layer through which the wave propagates. In the normal propagation, the radar line-of-sight range (D) can be expressed as follows though the distance is generally said about 10% longer than the distance to the optical line-of-sight range (see Fig. 6.1).
D = 2.23
( h
1
+ h
2
)
(nm) h1 : Height of radar scanner above sea level (m) h2 : Height of target above sea level (m)
Fig. 6.2 shows how to radar line-of-sight range in normal wave propagation.
D
Earth h1
Radar
Target h2
Fig. 6.1
6 – 1
6.1
h2(m)
700
660
600
500
400
300 h1(m)
30
20
10
5
0
Height of radar scanner
D (nm)
70
40
30
20
60
50
10
0
Line-of-sight range
200
100
50
25
10
0
Height of target
Fig. 6.2
When the height of own ship’s antenna is 10m, for example,
a) When the radar line-of-sight range is 64nm, the height of a target to be observed on the radar screen have to be 660m or more.
b) When the height of a target is 10m, the radar line-of-sight range is 15nm. But the maximum radar range varies with size of target and weather condition, and the range may increase or decrease.
6
6 – 2
6.2 ~ 6.4
6.2
Strength of Reflection from Target
The strength of target echo returns depends on component materials and shape of the target as well as height and size of the target, and the echo returns from a high and large target is not always strong in general.
In particular, coastal lines on the screen are affected by land forms, and, when a low land coastal line continues, only inland mountain echo returns are displayed on the screen. So the distance to a coastal line should be measured very carefully.
A mountain to be displayed on the screen.
Coastal line not to be displayed on the screen.
Fig. 6.3
6.3
Sea Clutters
When the sea is rough, a bright and wide picture appears in the center of the screen. The higher the waves are, the stronger echo returns. Swirling current is sometimes displayed as smooth as coastal line.
6.4
False Echoes
Pictures of targets which do not exist actually may bother the observer sometimes. The following are supposed to be causes of such false echoes:
[I] Shadow Effect
When the scanner is located in some area, radar waves are reflected with funnel or mast in the vicinity and targets in the direction may not appear on the screen. To check if there exists any shadow area, observe where sea clutters are thin and do not exist on the screen. Such shadow area may appear in the same direction all the time, if any. In this case, you should memorize the direction.
6 – 3
6.4
[II] Influence of Side Lobe
An ark with an broken line may appear in the same distance as the video by the scanner beam main lobe. Such false echo is relatively easier to be detected when the target is isolated (see Fig. 6.4).
Fig. 6.4
[III] False Echo by Secondary Reflection
When a target exists near the own ship, two echoes, true echo and indirect echo of the same target may appear. The true echo is caused by direct reflection from the target, and the indirect echo is caused by secondary reflection from mast or funnel as shown in Fig. 6.5. The indirect echo appears in the direction of the mast or funnel.
Direct radio wave path
True echo
Radar scanner
Funnel
Radio wave path affected by secondary reflection
Indirect echo caused by secondary reflection from funnel
Fig. 6.5
[IV] Indirect Echo by Multiple Reflection
When there is a building or a large ship having a large vertical surface as shown in Fig. 6.6, evenly spaced echoes caused by multiple reflection may be displayed. In this case, nearest echo is the true echo of the target.
6
Fig. 6.6
6 – 4
6.4
[V] Anomalous Propagation
The maximum radar range depends on the heights of the antenna and target as explained in section
“6.1 Radar Line-of-sight Range”. If duct occurs on the sea surface in certain atmospheric conditions, however, a transmitted beam of enery will be abnormally propagated and targets far away from the own ship may be detected.
For example, when the radar has been set to the range of 6nm short pulse (with repetition frequency of 1560Hz), the first pulse is reflected from a target about 52nm or more away and is received at the time of next pulse repetition and its false echo is formed at a place about 52nm shorter than the actual distance.
Should a false echo appears 5nm away on the screen, the true distance of the target is 5+52=57nm.
When the radar has been set to the range of 1.5 nm short pulse or medium pulse (with the repetition pulse of 2080Hz), a false echo may appear at a place about 39nm shorter than the actual distance.
This kind of false echo can be judged in observing distance changes of echoes by changing the range scale (the repetition frequency).
When those false echoes always appear on the screen, set "ECONOMY" mode of transmission repetition frequency.
See subsection “8.5.3.6 Setting Transmission Repetition Furequency” or section “3.4 Using Function
Key [FUNC]”.
[VI] Radar Interference
When a radar of the same frequency band is near the own ship, a radar interference pattern will appear on the screen. This interference causes various patterns consisting of many spots. Since these spots do not appear at same places, they can be distinguished from target echoes. (see Fig. 6.7).
Fig. 6.7
6 – 5
6.5
6.5
Display of Radar Transponder
SART (Search and Radar Transponder) is life preserving device approved by GMDSS which is used for locating survivors in the event of a disaster or distress. SART operates in the 9GHz frequency band. When it receives a radar signal (interrogating radio wave) of 9GHz transmitted by a rescue ship or aircraft radar,
SART transmits a series of respouse signals to the searchers to indicate the distress position.
In order to see the SART or radar beacon mark on the radar screen.
q RANGE SCALE : Select 6 or 12 nm w SEA control e AUTO SEA
: Set to minimum
: OFF r TUNE t IR y PROCESS
: DETUNED to reduce the clutter
: Set IR OFF
: Set PROCESS OFF
SART Code
Position of SART
Position of the
Rescue Craft
6
Land
Other Ships
Attention
When above settings q to y are made to display SART signals, objects around the own ship will not appear on the radar screen, so perform thorough visual monitoring of the sea area around the own ship to avoid any collision or stranding.
Further, when more than one radar systems are mounted, while using a 9GHz band radar for searching SART signals, be sure to use another radar as an ordinary radar to perform monitoring of objects around the own ship to avoid any collision, check of the position of the own ship to avoid any stranding, and so on.
Need to return the set for normal operation on completeion.
6 – 6
7
MAINTENANCE
7.1
Routine Maintenance···········································7-1
7.2
Maintenance of Each Unit ···································7-2
7.1
Routine Maintenance
CAUTION
Internal inspection and maintenance must be conducted by our special maintenance personnel, otherwise fire or an electric shock may occur.
Ask our sales department, nearest office or your local distributor for internal inspection and maintenance.
Be sure to turn the main power source off before maintenance, otherwise an electric shock may occur.
CAUTION
Do not use any organic solvent such as thinner or benzine when cleaning the surface.
Otherwise the surface coating may be damaged. For cleaning of the surface, remove dirt and dust and wipe it with a clean, dry cloth.
Maintenance as described below is required for keeping the radar in a good condition. Since appropriate maintenance reduces failure, it is recommended to maintain the radar regularly.
7.1.1 Cleaning
7.1.1.1 Cleaning of the Radar
Clear the radar body of dust, soil or seawater as much as possible with a dry cloth. In particular, completely clean the air duct using a brush so as to allow sufficient air to go through it.
7.1.1.2 Cleaning of the ATA
When sea water of fresh water is sprinkled on this equipment, wipe it immediately.
It might cause a fault and an incorrect operation.
Softly wipe the dirt of this equipment by soaking a detergent in a soft cloth in such a degree that the detergent cannot be dropped.
7 – 1
7.2
Maintenance of Each Unit
7.2.1 Scanner unit NKE-1055
／ 1056
WARNING
Before starting maintenance of the scanner unit, be sure to turn off the main power source, otherwise you may get an electric shock or be injured.
Be sure to set the safety switch for stopping the scanner unit to "OFF", otherwise you may be injured.
After maintenance, set the safety switch for stopping the scanner unit to "ON" (see Figs. 7.1 and 7.2).
1) Front Radiating Window
If the front radiating window is soiled with soot, salt, dust, paint or bird's dropping, radarbeam will be attenuated or reflected and radar performance will be degraded.
Check the radiating window, and if it is soiled, wipe it with a soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean all the time.
Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichloroethylene or ketone for cleaning, otherwise the radiant plane will be deteriorated.
2) Scanner Unit Mechanism
(1) Oiling to Gear
Apply grease evenly to the main shaft driving gear and the encoder driving gear by using a spreader or brush. Greasing at short intervals is effective to prevent gears from wear and to extend the service life. Make it a rule to grease them every six months at least.
Use Mobilux 2 of Mobile Oil.
(2) Mounting Legs
Check the Mounting legs and mounting bolts of the scanner frame at a certain interval for corrosion and keep them in order. Apply paint to them every six month because painting is the best measure against corrosion.
(3) Motor
Check the brush and commutator contact every 200 operating hours and replace it if the brush extremely wears (a spare is attached). The brush service life is approximately 3,000 hours. Replace the brush when it has worn to the notch at the two-thirds of the total length (see Fig. 7.3).
7
7 – 2
7.2
Safety switch
Fig. 7.1 NKE-1055 Scanner unit (Rear)
Safety switch
Fig. 7.2 NKE-1056 Scanner unit (Rear)
7 – 3
7.2
Notch
(replace it when it has worn to this point
Contact surface with commutator
Carbon brush
Spring
Fig. 7.3 Carbon Brush
7.2.2 Display Unit NCD-3901-2
Cleaning of CRT Surface
Dusts accumulated on the CRT surface will reduce clarity and darken pictures.
For cleaning, wipe it with a soft cloth (flannel or cotton) wetted with water. Do not wipe it strongly with a dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.
CAUTION
When cleaning the CRT, do not wipe it strongly with a dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner, otherwise it will be damaged or deteriorated.
7
7 – 4
8
COUNTERMEASURES
FOR TROUBLE
AND
ADJUSTMENT
8.1
Function Check ····················································8-1
8.2
Failure Check ·······················································8-8
8.3
Troubleshooting ················································8-10
8.4
Replacement of Major Parts ·····························8-14
8.5
Adjustment and Setting ····································8-19
8.1
Function Check
8.1.1 Function Check
Regularly check the radar and whenever abnormalities being found, investigate the cause of trouble. In checking, pay special attention to the high voltage circuits and take care not to cause any trouble by error or carelessness during the measurement. Take note of the results of check, which would be very effective for inspection in the future.
Conduct the function checks in accordance with Table 8.1 and in the order as specified in the table.
Table 8.1 Function Check List
Equipment to be checked
Check item Criteria Remark
The LED is on during operation.
48 nm range Scanner Receiver’s tuning LED
Pictures on the screen
Sensitivity
Brilliance of CRT
Display unit Various markers
Various numerical indications
Illumination
Magnetron current
Can be controlled correctly.
Refer to subsection 8.1.2.8.
8.1.2 Testing Functions with Menu
This radar enables to open the diagnosis menu to check functions.
Diagnostic 1
DIAGNO
STIC 1
1. SENSOR TEST
2. LINE TEST
3. ATA STATUS
4. ROM VERSION
5. ERROR LOGGING
MAG. I.
RUNNING TIME XXXX HR
TX TIME XXXX HR
Diagnostic 2
DIAGNO
STIC 2
1. MEMORY TEST (STBY)
2. KEY SWITCH TEST (STBY)
0. PREV
0. PREV
8 – 1
8.1.2.1 Memory Test
This test is used to check the operating status of the built-in memory.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
2. Press the
9
key four times to open the INIT SET #4 menu.
3. Press the
3
key to open the DIAGNOSTIC 2 menu.
4. Press the 1 key to select "MEMORY TEST".
5. Press the 1 to
6
keys to start checking.
Exit
"OK" appears on the normally operated items.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Memory Test
MEMORY TEST
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. SRAM
2. GRAPHIC RAM
3. FLASH ROM
4. ATA COMMON RAM
5. CARD 1
6. CARD 2
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
GRAPHIC
G0
G1
G1'
G2
G3
G4
G5
G5'
G6
G7
G7'
G8
G9
G9'
G10
G11
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
RAM
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
To close this menu, press (SUB MENU) key.
8.1
8
8 – 2
8.1
8.1.2.2 Key Switch Test
This test is used to check the operating status of each knob/switch.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 3 in subsection 8.1.2.1.
The DIAGNOSTIC 2 menu appears.
2. Press the
2
key to open the KEY SWITCH TEST menu.
3. Press controls or keys according to the menu item to check them.
They normally operate if the numeral displays change. "255" is displayed when the control is turned to the maximum and "0" when to the minimum.
Exit
4. Press the 0 key.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Key Switch Test
KEY SWITCH TEST
0. PREVIOUS MENU
KEY
TRACK BALL
VOLUME
SHAFT ENCODER
ROTARY SWITCH
X
Y
GAIN
TUNE
STC
FTC
BRILL
EBL
VRM
1
RED
DIPSW1
DIPSW2
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 xxxxx
42
38
255
126
0
0
250
0
255
8 – 3
8.1
8.1.2.3 Sensor Test
This test is used to check signals from the scanner unit.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 2 in subsection 8.1.2.1.
2. Press the
2
key to open the DIAGNOSTIC 1 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
1
key to open the SENSOR TEST menu.
"OK" is displayed when the bearing pulses (BP and BZ) are input in the display unit.
4. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Sensor Test
SENSOR
TEST
SAFETY KEY
BEARING PULSE (BP)
BEARING PULSE (BZ)
OK
OK
OK
0. PREV
8.1.2.4 Line Test
This test is used to check the communication status with optional equipment.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 2 in subsection 8.1.2.3.
The DIAGNOSTIC 1 menu appears.
Exit
2. Press the
2
key to open the LINE TEST menu.
"ON" appears when communication or connection has been established.
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Line Test
LINE TEST
NSK
UART1
UART2
ATA
ON
ON
OFF
ON
0. PREV
8
8 – 4
8.1
8.1.2.5 ATA Status
This test is used to check the acquiring status of the ATA. The display is available only when the ATA
(NCA-843) is used.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 2 in subsection 8.1.2.3.
The DIAGNOSTIC 1 menu appears.
Exit
2. Press the
3
key to open the ATA STATUS.
When the ATA is not installed, "**" appears.
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
ATA Status
ATA
STATUS
TRACKING NUMBER
TD INTERRUPT NUMBER
GZ NUMBER
0. PREV
8.1.2.6 ROM Version
This test is used to check the versions of the software.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 2 in subsection 8.1.2.3.
The DIAGNOSTIC 1 menu appears.
Exit
2. Press the
4
key to open the ROM VERSION.
The versions of MAIN CPU, NSK, ATA CPU and ATA TD are displayed.
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
ROM Version
ROM
VERSION
MAIN CPU
NSK
ATA CPU
ATA TD
V 1.01
V 1.0
V 1.0
V 1.0
21/09/1998
0. PREV
8 – 5
8.1
8.1.2.7 Error Logging
This test is used to display the history of the errors occurred.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 2 in subsection 8.1.2.3.
The DIAGNOSTIC 1 menu appears.
Exit
2. Press the
5
key to open the ERROR LOGGING.
Refer to subsection “3.3.14 Stopping Alarm” for the contents of error information.
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Error Logging
ERROR
LOGGING
0. PREV
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
8
8 – 6
8.1
8.1.2.8 Magnetron Current, Running and Transmission Time
This test is used to check the magnetron current by displaying the magnetron current bar.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 2 in subsection 8.1.2.3.
The DIAGNOSTIC 1 menu appears.
The magnetron current bar, the totals of the running and transmission times are displayed.
RANGE
0.125 to 0.75nm
1.5nm
3nm
6 to 96 and 120 nm
JMA-7725
1 to 3 scales
5 to 8 scales
5 to 8 scales
5 to 8 scales
JMA-7710
1 to 2 scales
3 to 5 scales
3 to 5 scales
3 to 5 scales
Exit 2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
The running time indicates the time when the power has been turned on and the transmission time indicates the total time when transmission has actually been conducted.
Diagnostic 1
DIAGNO
STIC 1
1. SENSOR TEST
2. LINE TEST
3. ATA STATUS
4. ROM VERSION
5. ERROR LOGGING
0. PREV
MAG. I.
RUNNING TIME
TX TIME
XXXX HR
XXXX HR
8 – 7
8.2
Failure Check
For semiconductor circuits, most troubles are considered to hardly occur without improper design, insufficient inspection, other external or artificial factors. Causes of most troubles are disconnection of high value resistor by humidity, defective variable resistor and imperfect contacts of buttons and relays.
Since troubles may also be caused by defective parts, improper adjustment (mostly improper adjustment of the tuning) and insufficient service (mostly imperfect contact of cable), further inspections and adjustments will be effective by taking the above into account (refer to Table 8.2 Failure Check List).
Since there must be some cause for fusing, be sure to investigate it even if no failure occurs after replacement.
At the same time, keep in mind that each fuse have prearching time-current characteristics. Table 8.3 shows fuses in use.
Table 8.2 Failure Check List
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Failure status
No display on CRT
The scanner unit does not rotate.
No radar video appears although the scanner unit rotates (letters and markers are displayed).
The control switch is disabled.
No radar video appears although some noise occurs (letters and markers are displayed).
No letter or marker appears although radar video does.
Poor sensitivity
Probable cause
a. Power failure. Check the power LED (on when it normally operates).
b. Fuse F5001 or 5002 (10A each) is fused.
c. Monitor failure. Check that the heater is turned on.
d. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure.
e. Low ship's power.
a. Fuse F5003 or 5004 (7A time lag) is fused.
b. Rotation control circuit (I ／ F circuit PCB PC101) failure.
c. Driving motor B101 failure.
d. Scanner safety switch S101 failure.
e. The motor control signal (C2) is disconnected.
a. Receiver failure.
b. Time base circuit PCB (PC4402) failure.
c. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure.
d. Shaft encoder B102 failure.
a. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure if it is still disabled even after the power is turned on again.
a. Fuse F5005 (0.5A) is fused.
b. Modulator or magnetron failure.
c. Power failure. Check the modulating high voltage (HV).
d. Time base circuit (PC4402) PCB failure. Check the transmission trigger (TI).
a. CPU control circuit (PC4401) PCB failure.
a. Magnetron deterioration ／ failure.
b. Modulator or pulse width switching failure.
c. Receiver ／ MIC failure.
d. Water leakage from radiating window or wave guide
(soil, ice or snow on the window, or corrosion inside the wave guide).
e. Tuning voltage failure.
f. The pulse width switching signal (PW) is fused.
8
8 – 8
8.2
Table 8.2 (Continued)
No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Failure status
Distorted display
No display appears even after pressing the fixed or variable range marker, electronic cursor or panel lighting key.
The screen returns to the default during operation.
No alarm occurs.
Radar tracking does not function.
a. Low ship's power.
b. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure.
c. Power (PC5101) failure.
a. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure.
a. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure.
b. Time base circuit PCB (PC4402) failure.
c. Low video brilliance.
a. "SYNC" or "STEP" is not properly set on the NSK (PC4201).
The NUP or CUP display cannot be selected.
"FAN" appears on the lower of the screen.
a. FAN failure. (B1)
Probable cause
a. Monitor failure or adjustment error.
b. The horizontal (HS) or vertical (VS) synchronous signal is fused.
c. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure.
a. The marker brilliance is adjusted to the lowest.
(See section “3.2 Preparation”) b. CPU control circuit PCB (PC4401) failure.
CAUTION
In case of fan failure, radar unit will fail.
If fan failure occures, turn off the power at once, you should change the fan.
Table 8.3 List of Fuses in Use
Location Parts No.
Rated current
Protection circuit
Inner
Inner
Inner
Inner
F5001 to F5002 10A AC100V
F5001 to F5002 5A AC220V
F5003 to F5004 7A Time lag
F5005 0.5A
Display unit
Power supply F1,F3,F5
Power supply F2
3.15A
10A
Power supply F4
NSK F1 to F4
0.5A
0.5A PC4201
Type
MF60NR-10A
MF60NR-5A
MF61-TS7
MF60NR-0.5A
MF51NN-3.15A
MF51NN-10A
MF51NN-0.5A
MF51NN-0.5A
8 – 9
8.3
Troubleshooting
8.3.1 Troubleshooting for the Radar
When this radar has gotten out of order, ask our sales department or your local distributor for repair.
Refer the following failure causes when inspection or repairing the radar.
1. Imperfect contact of cables between equipment at terminal boards
a) Imperfect contact at terminal board b) Improper cable terminal treatment - Earth or contact with other terminal.
c) Disconnection of cable
2. Imperfect contact of connectors inside equipment
The parts listed in Table 8.4 are attached to the radar as the standard spare parts.
Table 8.4 Spare Parts 6ZXRD00194
No. Parts Name
1 Fuse
Type/Code
MF60NR-10A
(5ZFAD00018)
Shape (Unit : mm) In use Spare Parts No.
30
φ6.4
2 6
F5001 to
F5002
Location
Inner display unit
AC100V
2 Fuse
MF60NR-5A
(5ZFAD00017)
30
φ6.4
2 6
F5001 to
F5002
Inner display unit
AC220V
3 Fuse
MF60NR-0.5A
(5ZFAD00013)
30
φ6.4
1 3 F5005
Inner display unit
4
5
6
7
8
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
MF61-TS7
(5ZFAD00447)
MF51NN-3.15A
(5ZFAD00227)
MF51NN-10A
(5ZFAD00457)
MF51NN-0.5A
(5ZFAD00041)
MF51NN-0.5A
(5ZFAD00041)
9 Brush
S00152-5C-70
(BRXP00918)
6
11
32
20
20
20
20
φ6.4
φ5.2
φ5.2
φ5.2
φ5.2
2
3
1
6
F5003 to
F5004
Inner display unit
9 F1,F3,F5
Display unit
Power supply circuit
3 F2
Display unit
Power supply circuit
4
1
12 F1 to F4
Display unit
NSK circuit
3 F4
Display unit monitor power supply circuit
1 2
Scanner unit
(NKE-1055)
10 Brush
54511-03
(BRXP05082)
8
36
1 2
Scanner unit
(NKE-1056)
8 – 10
8
8.3
Parts Name
Table 8.5 Special Parts
Type Maker Location Parts No.
V201 (10 kW) Magnetron
V201 (25 kW) Magnetron
MSF1425B New JRC
M1437 (A) New JRC
Scanner unit
Scanner unit
A101
A103
A102
Circulator
Diode limiter
Pin attenuator
FCX68
NJS6928
NJS6926
Toshiba
New JRC
New JRC
Scanner unit
Scanner unit
Scanner unit
Code
5VMAA00051
5VMAA00074
5AJAA00004
5EZAA00019
5ENAC00019
Scanner unit
Scanner unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Display unit
Table 8.6 Circuit Blocks for Repair
Location Circuit block name
Scanner unit (10 kW) Motor with gear
Scanner unit (25 kW) Motor with gear
Scanner unit (10 kW) Modulator
Scanner unit (25 kW) Modulator
Receiver
Interface circuit
Power supply unit
Power supply circuit
Power converter
NSK circuit
CPU control circuit
Time base circuit
Panel circuit-1
Panel circuit-2
Panel circuit-3
ATA circuit
Mother unit
Main control circuit
Video circuit-1
Video circuit-2
Degauss circuit
Panel circuit
Type
MPEM30076
MPEM30078
NMA-469A
Remark
Including PC201
(CME-261A)
NMA-470-1 Including PC210
(CPA-209) and excluding magnetron.
NRG-210A PC301 (CAE-344-3)
CMH-1562A PC101
NBL-267
CBD-1448
CBA-313
CMJ-304C
Including CBD-1448 and
CBA-313
PC5101
PC5102
PC4201
CMC-1055B PC4401
CED-44B PC4402
CCK-816
CCK-817
CCK-790E
CDC-1013
PC4501
PC4502
PC4503
PC4403 (optional)
CMC-1076
CAD-241
CAD-242
CSC-582
CMD-787
8 – 11
8.3
8.3.2 ATA Troubleshooting
When the operation of this equipment is incorrect, check the operation based on the following items. Since the cause and action are described every item, follow the instruction.
Nevertheless, if an incorrect operation is not restored or when incorrect locations are detected in the items other than the following items, contact our agency or your nearer branch office, branch shop, sales office, and own office of our company.
Symptom
The ATA symbol is not displayed
Cause and action
CAUSE On the MAIN MENU, the setting of "ATA BRILL" is low.
(ACTION) On the MAIN MENU, increase "ATA BRILL".
The ATA numeric display is disabled.
CAUSE On the ATA #1 menu, "SYMBOL" is OFF.
(ACTION) On the ATA #1 menu, set "SYMBOL" to ON.
CAUSE Faulty
(ACTION) Contact the sales company.
CAUSE On the ATA #1 menu, "TARGET DATA" is OFF.
(ACTION) On the ATA #1 menu, set "TARGET DATA" to ON.
A target cannot be acquired.
CAUSE Faulty
(ACTION) Contact the sales company.
CAUSE On the MAIN MENU, the setting of "ATA BRILL" is low.
(ACTION) On the MAIN MENU, increase "ATA BRILL".
CAUSE On the ATA #1 menu, "SYMBOL" is OFF.
(ACTION) On the ATA #1 menu, set "SYMBOL" to ON.
CAUSE An attempt is being made to acquire a target far from the maximum tracking range 32 NM.
(ACTION) Acquire the target within 32 NM.
CAUSE The setting of sensitivity and sea clutter suppression
(STC) is inappropriate.
(ACTION) Readjust the sensitivity and sea clutter suppression (STC) so that a target can clearly be displayed.
CAUSE Faulty
(ACTION) Contact the sales company.
8
8 – 12
8.3
Symptom
The guard zone cannot be set
Cause and action
CAUSE In "FUNCTION" on the RADAR ALARM menu, "ATA
ALARM" is not selected.
(ACTION) In "FUNCTION" on the RADAR ALARM menu, select
"ATA ALARM".
CAUSE Faulty
(ACTION) Contact the sales company.
Dangerous ship and lost symbols are displayed, but an alarm sound is not sounded
CAUSE On the ATA #2 menu, "CPA/TCPA" or "LOST
TARGET" of "AUDIBLE WARNING" are OFF.
(ACTION) On the ATA #2 menu, set the corresponding item to ON.
When a target ship is veered, the tracking of a vector is slow.
CAUSE On the ATA TEST menu, the value of "VECTOR
CONST" is small.
(ACTION) Increase the value of "VECTOR CONST".
The vector of an accompanying ship fluctuates.
CAUSE On the ATA TEST menu, the value of "VECTOR
CONST" is large.
(ACTION) Slightly reduce the value of "VECTOR CONST".
8 – 13
8.4
Replacement of Major Parts
WARNING
Before replacing parts, be sure to turn off the main power supply, otherwise you will get an electric shock and replaced parts will get out of order.
Before replacing the magnetron, discharge the high voltage circuit, otherwise you will get an electric shock.
When bringing your hand(s) close to the magnetron, remove your wrist watch, otherwise your wrist watch will break because the magnetron is a strong magnet.
Let two or more workers replace the CRT.
It is heavy, dropping it may injure you.
When removing wiring of the high voltage pack from the CRT, never touch the core wire
(metal parts) of the CRT anode cap with your bare hands, otherwise you will get an electric shock.
Attention
● When removing wiring, touch the terminal with the metal part of a screwdriver while keeping the terminal in contact with the frame.
[Replacement of Magnetron V201 (10kW : NKE-1055)]
Replace the magnetron as follows:
(1) Loosen the four A scanner unit screws (see Fig. 8.1).
(2) Lift the scanner unit to open the pedestal (see Fig. 8.1).
(3) Loosen the four B screws fixing the transceiver unit (see Fig. 8.1).
(4) Move the transceiver upward to remove it from the pedestal.
(5) Remove the four C screws and loosen the two D screws to remove the sender from the transceiver (Fig.
8.2).
(6) Loosen the five E sender screws to remove the sender cover (see Fig. 8.2).
(7) Loosen the four F screws and remove the pulse transformer cover (see Fig. 8.4).
(8) Remove the cable G between the pulse transformer and magnetron from the transformer side using a soldering iron (see Fig. 8.4).
(9) Remove the four H screws fixing the magnetron, the seven I screws fixing the PCB and the four J screws fixing the IC to remove the magnetron (see Fig. 8.3).
(10) For remounting the magnetron, follow the opposite procedure.
In this case, properly connect the lead wires.
8
8 – 14
8.4
B
A
A
B
Fig. 8.1 Internal View of 10kW Scanner Unit NKE-1055
E
C
D E
Fig. 8.2 Transmitter Unit of 10kW Scanner Unit NKE-1055
8 – 15
C
I I J I H
8.4
I J I
H
Fig. 8.3 Internal View of Sender of 10kW Scanner Unit NKE-1055
F
F
G
Fig. 8.4 Pulse Transformer of 10kW Scanner Unit NKE-1055
8 – 16
8
8.4
[Replacement of Magnetron V201 (25kW : NKE-1056)]
Replace the magnetron as follows:
(1) Loosen the four A screws from the cover on the left side (when the scanner unit is viewed from the cable ground) to remove the cover (see Fig. 8.5).
(2) Remove the three modulator cover B screws and loosen the seven C screws to remove the cover (see
Fig. 8.6).
(3) Make sure that the modulating high voltage circuit has been discharged before removing the magnetron socket (see Fig. 8.7).
(4) Remove the six D screws fixing the magnetron to remove the magnetron (see Fig. 8.7).
(5) For remounting the magnetron, follow the opposite procedure.
In this case, properly connect the lead wires.
Handling of magnetron which had been stored for a long time
Since the magnetron which had been stored for a long time may cause spark and become unstable after you start using it, age it as follows:
(1) Make the cathode pre-heating time longer than usual (for 20 to 30 minutes in the standby mode).
(2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and gradually change it to the long pulse range. If the operation becomes unstable during the process, return it to the standby mode immediately. Leave it as it is for 5 to 10 minutes and operate it again.
(3) Set the range to 24nm or more, and put the radar into the transmission mode for about 15 minutes and adjust the tuning.
(4) Adjust RV1 in the receiver so that the [TUNE] bar indicator of the display unit reaches 10 without saturation.
A
A
Fig. 8.5 Internal View of 25kW Scanner Unit NKE-1056
8 – 17
C
C
C
B
Fig. 8.6 Internal View of Modulator of 25kW Scanner Unit NKE-1056
D
D
8.4
D
Fig. 8.7 Internal View of Modulator of 25kW Scanner Unit NKE-1056
[Replacement of Diode Limiter (A102)]
Remove the four screws fixing both the receiver and the PIN attenuator. Remove the four screws fixing the diode limiter and another four screws fixing both the diode limiter and the PIN attenuator to take off the diode limiter. When installing the new diode limiter, pay attention to its direction so that the arrow faces in the direction of the receiver.
[Replacement of PIN Attenuator (A103)]
Remove the four screws fixing the PIN attenuator in the same way as for replacing the diode limiter and remove the PIN attenuator.
8 – 18
8
8.5
Adjustment and Setting
Although each component of the radar has completely been adjusted in the factory, the adjustments as described in subsection 8.5.1 to 8.5.3 are required after installation.
8.5.1 NSK Unit Adjustment
The NSK unit of the radar can be applied to almost all types of gyrocompasses just by changing the settings of keys (step motor type of 24VDC to 100VDC and synchro motor type with primary exciting voltages of
50VAC to 115VAC).
Before turning the power on, follow the procedures below to set switches S1, S2 and S5, and jumper JP1 on the NSK circuit (PC4201) to make them suitable to the type of the gyrocompass.
Since the gyro selection keys on the NSK circuit is set to the 360X synchrogyro before shipment, adjust the keys as follows to suit it to the gyrocompass fitted on the ship. For details, see “Appendix 12 Setting Table of the Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches”.
(1) Before turning on the system, set the keys and jumper pin on the NSK unit (PC4201) as follows:
S1 : Select the switch to [OFF].
S2 : Gyrocompasses output stepper or synchro signal. So, be sure to check the type of the gyrocompass fitted on the ship before setting S2.
Synchronizing signal ········ Set S2 to the [SYNC] position.
Stepper signal ··················· Set S2 to the [STEP] position.
S5 : Set S5 to suite the applicable gyro in accordance with the S5 setting table.
S5-1 : Type
Synchronizing signal ····················· [OFF]
Stepper signal ································ [ON]
S5-2, -3 : Gyro ratio
S5-2
S5-3
360X
OFF
OFF
180X
OFF
ON
90X
ON
OFF
36X
ON
ON
8 – 19
8.5
S5-4 : Gyro direction
Normal (clockwise) ······················· [OFF]
Reverse (counterclockwise) ·········· [ON]
S5-5 : Log type
Pulse signal ··································· [OFF]
Synchronizing signal ····················· [ON]
S5-6 : Not used
S5-7, -8 : Log ratio
S5-7
S5-8
Pulses/nm (Pulse signal)
800 400 200
Rotations/nm (Synchro signal)
360X 180X 90X
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
100
36X
ON
ON
S6 : Log test
Select the switch to [NORML] position.
S7 : BSH (IMO) spec
Select the switch to [BSH] position.
JP1 : Gyro type
Synchro signal ... Select the [SYNC] position.
Stepper signal ... Select the [STEP] position.
(2) Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the NSK circuit (PC4201).
(3) Set S1 to [ON].
* If radar echoes and the own ship's true bearing indications are displayed in reverse direction after the power is turned on, set S5-4 to [ON].
8
8 – 20
8.5
Table 8.7 Gyro Log Selection Switches (DIP switch S5)
5 6 7
SYNC
STEP
360X
180X
90X
36X
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
3
Gyrational direction
(DIRECTION)
Normal (NOR)
Reverse (REV)
Type
PULSE
SYNCRO
0
1
0
1
4
0
1
0
1
0
Pulse number
(PULSES/NM)
800P/360X
400P/180X
200P/90X
100P/30X
1
1
0
0
8
0
1
0
1
8 – 21
8.5
8.5.2 Adjustment and Setting at Installation
8.5.2.1 Adjusting Tuning
Procedures
1. Set the range at 24nm or more to adjust the [TUNE] control at the center.
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
3. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
4. Press the
3
key to select "TUNE ADJUSTMENT".
5. Press the
ENT
key to clear the menu and display the radar screen.
“Adjusting TUNE” will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
6. Press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key or plus (+) side of the
RANGE key to make the turning indication of the lower left of the screen the longest and press the
ENT
key.
Init set #2
INIT
SET #2
1. BEARING ADJUSTMENT
2. RANGE ADJUSTMENT
3. TUNE ADJUSTMENT
4. SETTING OF PRF 23
5. PM ADJUSTMENT
6. DATA INPUT FORMAT 183
7. INITIALIZING GPS MENU (STBY)
8. SETTING DGPS MENU (STBY)
JRC 180
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8
8 – 22
8.5
8.5.2.2 Adjusting Bearing
Adjust the system so that the target measured by the ship compass corresponds to the bearing of the video displayed on the radar PPI screen.
Procedures
1. Press the
AZI
MODE
key to select the HUP display.
2. Measure the bearing of an appropriate target (e.g. stationary ship, break water, buoy) against the bow using the ship compass (a target at 25
° is
assumed here as an example) .
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
4. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
5. Press the
1
key to select "BEARING ADJUSTMENT".
6. Press the
ENT
key to clear the menu and display the radar screen.
“Adjusting BEARING” will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
7. After EBL1 appears, turn the EBL control to adjust EBL1 to the target selected in procedure 2 and press the ENT key.
(adjust the bearing to 25˚ by following the example in procedure 2).
8. If the bearing does not completely match, repeat procedure 3 and after.
Init set #2
INIT
SET #2
1. BEARING ADJUSTMENT
2. RANGE ADJUSTMENT
3. TUNE ADJUSTMENT
4. SETTING OF PRF
5. PM ADJUSTMENT
23
6. DATA INPUT FORMAT 183
7. INITIALIZING GPS MENU (STBY)
8. SETTING DGPS MENU (STBY)
JRC 180
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8 – 23
8.5
8.5.2.3 Adjusting Range
Adjust the range of the target on the screen so that it is properly displayed.
Procedures
1. Find a target whose range is known on the PPI screen.
2. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
3. Press the 9 key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
4. Press the
2
key to select "RANGE ADJUSTMENT".
5. Press the
ENT
key to clear the menu and display the radar screen.
“Adjusting RANGE” will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
6. Press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key or plus (+) side of the
RANGE key to adjust the range and press the
ENT
key.
7. If the range does not completely match, repeat procedure 3 and after.
Init set #2
INIT
SET #2
1. BEARING ADJUSTMENT
2. RANGE ADJUSTMENT
3. TUNE ADJUSTMENT
4. SETTING OF PRF
5. PM ADJUSTMENT
23
6. DATA INPUT FORMAT 183
7. INITIALIZING GPS MENU (STBY)
8. SETTING DGPS MENU (STBY)
JRC 180
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8
8 – 24
8.5
8.5.2.4 Setting Antenna Height
Adjust by the radar scanner unit height. Be careful to select scanner unit antenna height as the selection affects the effect of STC control.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key four times to open the INIT SET #4 menu.
3. Press the
1
key to open the MAINTENANCE MENU.
4. Press the 1 key to select "ANTENNA HEIGHT".
Exit
5. Press the 1 key to select "UP to 5m", "5 - 10m", "10 - 20m" or "MORE
20m".
6. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Maintenance Menu
MAINTENANCE MENU
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. ANTENNA HEIGHT
2.
3. ANTENNA SWITCH
4. PARTIAL MASTER RESET
5. ALL MASTER RESET
6. INTERNAL SETTING to CARD 2
7. CARD 2 to INTERNAL SETTING
8. MEMORIZE USER SETTING
9. RESTORE USER SETTING
UP to 5M 5–10M
TRANSFER
10–20M
DISCARD
MORE 20M
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
Note
● This function cannot be used with the radar mode is selected.
8 – 25
8.5
8.5.3 Various Setting
8.5.3.1 Setting Own Ship Speed Equipment
This function is used to select the equipment for inputting the own ship course.
The selection should be made in accoradance with section “3.2 Preparation”.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key to open the INIT SET #1 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
2
key to select "SPEED EQUIPMENT".
4. Press the
2
key to select "MANUAL", "LOG", "GPS", "2AXIS/WT" or
"2AXIS/BT".
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Init set #1
INIT
SET #1
1.
2. SPEED EQUIPMENT
3. MANUAL SPEED
4. FUNCTION MENU
5. BUZZER VOLUME
6. DRIFT SET
DRIFT
7.
8.
MANUAL
0.0KT
LOG
OFF
0.0
°
0.0KT
LOW
GPS 2AXIS/WT
MIDDLE HIGH
0. PREV
9. NEXT
2AXIS/BT
8
8 – 26
8.5
8.5.3.2 Setting True Bearing
This function is used to set the system so that the master gyro indication corresponds to that of the radar.
You don't need to set that again after power on unless you turn off the power of the master gyro once you set that, because the inner electronic circuit is supplied the power from the gyro.
After turning on the system
When you turn on the system for the first time after installation, or when the master gyro is turned off, the alarm of gyro setting appear on the bottom of screen to prompt to enter a number. At this time, press the plus
(+) side of the
RANGE
key or minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key according to the bearing of the compass, and press the
ENT
key.
And, after pressing the
ENT
key, you can also enter this with numeric keys (
0
to
9
) as the following procedures.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
2
key to open the RADAR #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the 1 key to select "GYRO".
4. Press the
ENT
or 1 key to set the system in the numerical value entry mode.
5. Press numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) according to the bearing of the compass and press the
ENT
key (359.9
° max.).
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Radar #2
RADAR #2
1. GYRO
2. EBL BEARING
3. PARALLEL INDEX LINE
4.
5. CURSOR MENU
6. STERN FLASH
7. KM
／ NM VRM1
8. KM ／ NM VRM2
0.0
°
TRUE
OFF
OFF
KM
KM
RELATIVE
ON
ON
NM
NM
0. PREV
8 – 27
8.5
Setting the true bearing using system
When you adjust true bearing using system, press the
AZI
MODE
key for 2 seconds. The number entering window for gyro setting appear on the bottom of screen.
At this time, press the plus (+) side of the
RANGE
key or minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key according to the bearing of the compass, and press the
ENT
key.
8.5.3.3 Setting Ship Speed
This function is used to manually set the ship speed.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key to open the INIT SET #1 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
3
key to select "MANUAL SPEED".
4. Press the
ENT
or
3
key to set the system in the numerical value entry mode.
5. Set the speed using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT key (99.9 max.)
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
After data is entered, the following letters appear on the top of the screen.
Entered by GPS : GPS
Entered by DGPS : DGPS
Entered by LORAN : LOR
Entered by other : NMEA Talker ID is displayed. Ask the manufacturer for the ID (see page 8-33).
Init set #1
INIT
SET #1
1.
2. SPEED EQUIPMENT
3. MANUAL SPEED
4. FUNCTION MENU
5. BUZZER VOLLUME
6. DRIFT SET
DRIFT
7.
8.
MANUAL
0.0KT
OFF
0.0
°
0.0KT
LOG
LOW
GPS
MIDDLE
2AXIS/WT
HIGH
0. PREV
9. NEXT
2AXIS/BT
8 – 28
8
8.5
8.5.3.4 Setting Drift
This function is used to manually set the drift.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key to open the INIT SET #1 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
6
key to select "DRIFT".
4. Press the
ENT
or
6
key to set the system in the numerical value entry mode.
5. Set the direction of the drift using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT
key.
6. Set the speed of the drift using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT
key (9.9 max.).
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Init set #1
INIT
SET #1
1.
2. SPEED EQUIPMENT
3. MANUAL SPEED
4. FUNCTION MENU
5. BUZZER VOLLUME
6. DRIFT SET
DRIFT
7.
8.
MANUAL
0.0KT
OFF
0.0
°
0.0KT
LOG
LOW
GPS
MIDDLE
2AXIS
／ WT
HIGH
0. PREV
9. NEXT
2AXIS
／ BT
8 – 29
8.5
8.5.3.5 Setting PRF
This function is used to change the repetition frequency to reduce mutual interference.
Whenever the radar interference is not disappeared on the screen by using IR function (subsection “3.2.9
Rejecting Radar Interference”), set PRF according with this section.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
3. Press the
4
key twice to select "SETTING OF PRF".
4. Press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key or plus (+) side of the
RANGE
BRILL key or control to select number. (0-39)
Exit
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Note
● This function cannot be used in the plotter mode.
Init set #2
INIT
SET #2
1. BEARING ADJUSTMENT
2. RANGE ADJUSTMENT
3. TUNE ADJUSTMENT
4. SETTING OF PRF
5. PM ADJUSTMENT
23
6. DATA INPUT FORMAT
7. INITIALIZING GPS MENU (STBY)
183
8. SETTING DGPS MENU (STBY)
JRC 180
0. PREV
9. NEXT
Note
● By pushing the [BRILL] control the pulse repetition frequency is directly changed without opening the
SUB MENU.
8
8 – 30
8.5
8.5.3.6 Setting Transmission Repetition Frequency
• Select one of three transmission repetition frequency types.
• The transmission repetition frequency relates to the sensitivity and power consumption (life span of magnetron).
• When the transmission repetition frequency is high, the sensitivity improves, however, the power consumption also increases, reducing the life span of the magnetron.
• When the transmission repetition frequency is low, the power consumption decreases, increasing the magnetron life span, however, the sensitivity deteriorates.
• The radar trails reduction processing demonstrates the effect when the transmission repetition frequency is "ECONOMY".
NORMAL : Balanced setting for the sensitivity and the life span of the magnetron.
HIPOWER : Hipower setting; use for detecting small targets.
However, the life span of the magnetron is reduced.
ECONOMY : Economy setting. The maximum life span of the magnetron can be increased.
However, the sensitivity deteriorates slightly.
Use this mode at radar trail fine line processing.
When the fales echoes appear by anomalous propagation, using this mode reduces those fales echoes.
See section “6.4 [V] Anomalous Propagation”.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
3
key to open the RADAR #3 menu.
3. Press the
4
key to select "XMIT REPETITION FREQUENCY".
Exit
4. Press the
4
key to select "NORMAL", "HIPOWER" or "ECONOMY".
5. Press the
ENT
key.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8 – 31
8.5
8.5.3.7 Connecting Navigation Equipment
This function is used to connect and set the GPS.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
6
key to select "DATA INPUT FORMAT".
4. Press the
6
key several times to select either "183", "JRC" or "180".
5. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
When "183" is selected, the talker ID is displayed on the bottom of the screen in the plot mode after data is received from the navigation system. Ask the navigation system manufacturer for the ID.
Initial set #2
INIT
SET #2
1. BEARING ADJUSTMENT
2. RANGE ADJUSTMENT
3. TUNE ADJUSTMENT
4. SETTING OF PRF
5. PM ADJUSTMENT
6. DATA INPUT FORMAT
23
7. INITIALIZING GPS MENU (STBY)
8. SETTING DGPS MENU (STBY)
183 JRC 180
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8
8 – 32
8.5
Talker Identifier Mnemonics
Talker device
Autopilot:
Communication: general magnetic digital selective calling (DSC) data receiver satelite radio-telephone (MF/HF) radio-telephone (VHF) scanning receiver
DECCA navigator
Direction finder
Electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS)
Emergency position indicating radio beacon (EPIRB)
Engine room monitoring systems
Global positioning system (GPS)
Heading sensor: compass, magnetic gyro, north seeking gyro, non-north seeking
Integrated instrumentation
Integrated navigation
LORAN: LORAN-A
LORAN-C
OMEGA navigation system
Proprietary code
Radar and/or ATA
Sounder, depth
Electronic positioning system, other/general
Sounder, scanning
Turn rate indicator
TRANSIT navigation system
Velocity sensor: Doppler, other/general speed log, water, magnetic speed log, water, mechanical
Transducer
Timekeepers, time/date: atomic clock chronometer quarts radio update
Weather instruments
SS
TI
TR
VD
P
RA
SD
SN
IN
LA
LC
OM
HC
HE
HN
II
ZC
ZQ
ZV
WI
VM
VW
YX
ZA
Identifier
AG
AP
CD
CR
CS
DF
EC
EP
ER
GP
CT
CV
CX
DE
8 – 33
8.5
8.5.3.8 Adjustment of the Performance Monitor Operation
Procedures
1. Press the
MAP
key to set the Radar Mode.
2. Press the
VRM1
VRM2
key to display VRM1 and set the range of VRM1 to 18 NM.
3. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
4. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
5. Press the
5
key to select "PM ADJUSTMENT".
6. Press the
ENT
key to display performance monitor screen.
A small menu will open in the lower right corner of the screen and the characters of
“During Performance Monitor Adjustment” and the character and numeral of “P. NON” will blink in it for approx. 30 sec.
The radar will be set automatically to relative motion, relative azimuth, off-center
OFF, and 24 NM.
7. When the blinking of the character and numeral of “P. NON” has stopped,
Exit press the minus (-) side of the
RANGE
key or plus (+) side of the
RANGE key to adjust the outer edge of the PM pattern so that it is aligned with the setting in Procedure 2.
8. Press the
ENT
key.
The menu will disappear and the LVR setting value on the Performance Monitor will be stored.
9. Remove the information label from the performance monitor and paste it to the indicator panel at an appropriate position.
10. Fill the information label with the value of P.MON displayed in the lower right corner of the screen with the date of check.
HL
PM pattern
18nm
8
Adjustment in Procedure 7
8 – 34
8.5
8.5.4 GPS Initial Setting
／ Receiving Status
8.5.4.1 GPS Initial Setting
Set the GPS receiver at the default values. Although GPS receiver starts measuring without setting the default values, it may take more than 10 minutes to start receiving after installation.
• Items to be set
Own ship position:
Exclusion satellite:
Geodetic system:
Antenna height:
Fixed mode:
DOP level:
Average position:
Approximate latitude and longitude (in minute) work sufficiently.
Using a disabled satellite may deteriorate the accuracy. The disabled satellite whose number has been input cannot be used for measurement.
The own ship position and the coastal line may shift if the geodetic system in the radar is different from that of the coastal line ROM card in use. Enter the appropriate geodetic system number described on page 8-37. The number for
Japan is 02.
Enter the height from the sea surface to the antenna.
Since the antenna height is constant in the case of a ship, 2D (2 dimensional) measurement is more stable.
In order to use accurate measurement results only, select "UP to 10" or "UP to
5".
Select "LONG" to reduce the position deviation, which delays the response.
Select "SHORT" to improve the response, which increases the deviation.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
3. Press the
7
key to open the INITIALIZE GPS
／GPS STATUS menu.
4. Press the numeric key (
1
to
7
) select an appropriate GPS initial setting item, and press the numeric key ( 0 to
9
)to enter the setting.
5. In order to change the contents of it, press the same numeric key (
1 to
7
).
In order to enter a numerical value, press the same numeric key (
0 to
9
).
6. After all setting is completed, press the
8
key to select "SEND
DATA".
7. Press the
8
key to wait to send data.
8 – 35
8.5
Exit
8. Press the
ENT
key to transmit the settings to the sensor.
• After transmission the display for indicating that transmission is completed appears.
• If transmission fails, the display for indicating that transmission error occurs appears.
In this case, check the sensor and cales.
9. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Initializing GPS ／ GPS status
INITIALIZE GPS / GPS STATUS
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. POSITION
2. EXCLUSION SAT
3. GEODETIC
4. ANTENNA HEIGHT
5. FIX MODE
6. DOP LEVEL
7. POSN AVERAGE
8. SEND DATA
9.
N xx
° xx. xxx'
Exxx
° xx. xxx' x x x x x x xx
(xxxxxxxxxxx) xxx M
2D
UP to 5
LONG
3D AUTO
UP to 10
MIDDLE
UP to 20
SHORT
GPS STATUS
RCV SAT
FIX
AZIMUTH
ELEVATE
LEVEL
STATUS
GPS RCV TIME-––:––
N xx
° xx. xxx' Exxx° xx. xxx' xx ALT xxxxxM DOP xx
31
USE
354
65
52
D
15
USE
202
47
53
D
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
28
–
306
23
00
T
22
–
126
15
00
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8
8 – 36
8.5
Geodetic System List
00 = WGS-84
01 = WGS-72
02 = Japan
03 = North American 1927 (U.S.)
04 = North American 1927 (Canada & Alaska)
05 = European 1950 (Europe)
06 = Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)
07 = Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England)
08 = NAD-83
11 = ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan)
12 = ARC 1950 (Botswana)
13 = AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia)
14 = BERMUDA 1957 (the Bermudas)
15 = BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Columbia)
16 = CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine)
17 = CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Island)
18 = CHUA ASTRO (Paraguay)
19 = CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil)
20 = DJAKARTA (VATAVIA) (Sumatra)
21 = EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe)
22 = GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand)
23 = GUAM 1963 (Guam)
24 = HAYFORD 1910 (Finland)
25 = HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland)
26 = INDIAN (India & Nepal)
27 = IRELAND 1965 (Ireland)
28 = KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia)
29 = L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Black Island)
30 = LIBERIA 1964 (Liberia)
31 = LUZON (Philippines)
32 = MERCHICH (Morocco)
33 = MINNA (Cameroon)
34 = NAHRWAN (Oman)
35 = NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad and Tobago)
36 = OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt)
37 = OLD HAWAIIAN (the Hawaii Islands)
38 = PICO DELAS NIEVES (the Canary Islands)
39 = PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America)
8 – 37
40 = PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (Southern Chile)
41 = PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands)
42 = QORNOQ (South Greenland)
43 = RT90 (Sweden)
44 = SANTA BRAZ (Sao Maguel, santa Maria Islands)
45 = SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South American)
46 = SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge and Terceira Island)
47 = TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei and East malaysia)
8.5
8
8 – 38
8.5
8.5.4.2 Checking GPS Receiving Status
Check the GPS receiving status.
• Item
Own ship position:
Built-in GPS time:
Elevation:
DOP: Displays the accuracy of the measurement results. GPS letters blink when it is
20 or lower, indicating a poor accuracy.
Receiving satellite: Displays the satellite number currently available for measurement.
Azimuth and elevation: Displays the azimuth and elevation angle of the receiving satellite.
Signal level: Displays the signal level of the receiving satellite. The signal with an intensity of 20 or lower may not be used for measurement.
Receiving status:
Displays the longitude and latitude of the own ship after measurement.
Displays the universal time measured by the GPS receiver.
Displays the elevation of the own ship. When "2D" is selected for the fixed mode, however, the antenna height input as the default is displayed.
Search = Status when the satellite is being searched.
Tracking = Status when the satellite is being tracked.
Demodulation = Status when the data from the satellite is being demodulated.
Use = Status when the satellite is being used for measurement.
• The GPS receiving status is displayed only when a sensor-type GPS receiver such as JLR-4310 is connected.
It is not displayed when an external navigation system is used.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
7
key to open the INITIALIZE GPS/GPS STATUS menu.
The GPS receiving status appears.
4. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8 – 39
Initializing GPS ／
INITIALIZE GPS / GPS STATUS
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. POSITION
2. EXCLUSION SAT
3. GEODETIC
4. ANTENNA HEIGHT
5. FIX MODE
6. DOP LEVEL
7. POSN AVERAGE
8. SEND DATA
9.
N xx
° xx. xxx'
Exxx
° xx. xxx' x x x x x x xx
(xxxxxxxxxxx) xxx M
2D 3D
UP to 5
LONG
AUTO
UP to 10
MIDDLE
UP to 20
SHORT
GPS STATUS
RCV SAT
FIX
AZIMUTH
ELEVATE
LEVEL
STATUS
GPS RCV TIME-––:––
N xx
° xx. xxx' Exxx° xx. xxx' xx ALT xxxxxM DOP xx
31
USE
354
65
52
D
15
USE
202
47
53
D
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
28
–
306
23
00
T
22
–
126
15
00
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8.5
8
8 – 40
8.5
8.5.5 Setting DGPS
／ Checking DGPS Receiving Status
8.5.5.1 Setting DGPS
Setting the beacon receiver is required for accurate measurement using the DGPS.
• Setting
Mode: Manual = Set the frequency and baud rate of the beacon receiver. This mode enables quick
DGPS receiving. Beacon cannot be received, however, when the own ship is outside the transmission area of the beacon receiver.
Auto = Automatically searches the beacon transmitting station and receives beacon. In this mode, however, a longer time is required for searching.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
3. Press the 8 key to open the SETTING DGPS
／DGPS STATUS menu.
4. Press the 1 key to select "MODE".
5. Press the 1 key to select "AUTO" or "MANUAL".
6. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. In the AUTO mode
Set the search step at 1 kHz for JAPAN.
After pressing the
4
key to select "SET DATA", press the
4
key to select
1 kHz , and press the
ENT
key.
In the MANUAL mode
Transmission starts after the frequency and baud rate of the beacon transmitting station inside the receiving area are set.
• After pressing the
2
key to select "FREQUENCY", press the numeric key
(
0
to
9
) and
ENT
key to select frequency. The frequency is as follows.
Daio-saki: 288 kHz , Tsurugi-saki: 309 kHz
• After pressing the
3
key to select "BAUD RATE", press the
3
key to move the underline to the baud rate at 200 bauds for Japan and press the
ENT
key to set it.
8. After entering the setting, press the
5
key to select "SEND DATA".
8 – 41
8.5
Exit
9. Press the
5
key to wait to send data.
10. Press the
ENT
key to send data.
After the setting is properly transmitted to the beacon receiver, the display for indicating that transmission is completed appears.
If transmission fails, the display for indicating that transmission error occurs appears.
In this case, check the beacon receiver and cables.
11. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Setting DGPS
／
SETTING DGPS ／ DGPS STATUS
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS NEMU
1. MODE
2. FREQUENCY
3. BAUD RATE (BPS)
4. SET DATA
5. SEND DATA
6.
7.
8.
9.
AUTO xxx. x kHz
50 100
MANUAL
200
1kHz 500Hz
STATUS BEACON RCV CONNECT
FREQUENCY
BAUD RATE
RSSI
–––––––– kHz
––––– BAUD
–––––
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
8
8 – 42
8.5
8.5.5.2 Checking DGPS Receiving Status
Checking the DGPS receiving status. When no beacon receiver is connected, or receiver or cable failure occurs, the message "BEACON RCV NONCONNECT" appears.
• Items
Frequency:
Baud rate:
RSSI:
Displays the frequency of the beacon station currently received.
Displays the baud rate of the beacon station currently received.
Displays the receiving intensity of the beacon station currently received. When it is 100 or lower, the beacon may not be received.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key twice to open the INIT SET #2 menu.
Exit
3. Press the
8
key to open the SETTING DGPS
／DGPS STATUS menu.
4. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Setting DGPS
／
SETTING DGPS
／ DGPS STATUS
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS NEMU
7.
8.
9.
1. MODE
2. FREQUENCY
3. BAUD RATE (BPS)
4. SET DATA
5. SEND DATA
6.
AUTO xxx. x kHz
50
1kHz
MANUAL
100
500Hz
200
STATUS BEACON RCV CONNECT
FREQUENCY
BAUD RATE
RSSI
–––––––– kHz
––––– BAUD
–––––
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
8 – 43
8.5
8.5.6 Maintenance Menu
The maintenance menu is used only by our service personnel during installation. Users are requested not to change the setting (bold faced items).
Maintenance Menu
MAINTENANCE MENU
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. ANTENNA HEIGHT
2.
UP to 5M
3. ANTENNA SWITCH
4. PARTIAL MASTER RESET
5. ALL MASTER RESET
6. INTERNAL SETTING to CARD 2
5–10M
TRANSFER
10–20M
DISCARD
MORE 20M
7. CARD 2 to INTERNAL SETTING
8. MEMORIZE USER SETTING
9. RESTORE USER SETTING
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
8.5.6.1 Antenna Switch
"DISCARD" is set on regular shipment.
Transmission can be enabled while the rotation of the scanner unit is stopped.
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key four times to open the INIT SET #4 menu.
Exit
3. Press the 1 key to open the MAINTENANCE MENU.
4. Press the
3
key to select "ANTENNA SWITCH".
5. Press the
3
key to select "TRANSFER" or "DISCARD".
When "TRANSFER" is selected, transmission is enabled while the rotation of the scanner unit is stopped.
6. Press the
ENT
key to confirm the setting.
7. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8
8 – 44
8.5
8.5.6.2 Partial Master Reset
This function is used to set the same settings as on shipment. Since the contents set by the user are cleared, only our service personnel is allowed to use this function.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 3 in subsection 8.5.6.1 to open the MAINTENANCE
MENU.
2. Press the
4
key to select "PARTIAL MASTER RESET".
Exit
3. Press the
4
key to set the system in the partial master reset standby mode.
4. Press the
ENT
key to reset or the
CLR
key not to reset according to the direction on the screen.
After resetting, the screen which appears after turning the power on is displayed.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8.5.6.3 Total Master Reset
This function is used by our service personnel after the software is written. Users are requested never to use this function.
8.5.6.4 Internal Setting to Card 2
This function is used to write the contents internally set into card 2. Use this function after inserting a memory card for writing to the lower side of the card slot.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 3 in subsection 8.5.6.1 to open the MAINTENANCE
MENU.
2. Press the
6
key to select "INTERNAL SETTING to CARD 2".
Exit
3. Press the
6
key to set the system in the standby mode.
4. Press the
ENT
key to write or the
CLR
key not to write according to the direction on the screen.
After writing, a message informing the completion of writing appears.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8 – 45
8.5
Maintenance Menu
MAINTENANCE MENU
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. ANTENNA HEIGHT
2.
3. ANTENNA SWITCH
4. PARTIAL MASTER RESET
5. ALL MASTER RESET
UP to 5M
6. INTERNAL SETTING to CARD 2
7. CARD 2 to INTERNAL SETTING
8. MEMORIZE USER SETTING
9. RESTORE USER SETTING
5–10M
TRANSFER
10–20M
DISCARD
MORE 20M
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
8.5.6.5 Card 2 to Internal Setting
This function is used to set the contents written in the card to the internal memory. Use this function after inserting the card to the lower side of the card slot.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 3 in subsection 8.5.6.1 to open the MAINTENANCE
MENU.
2. Press the
7
key to select "CARD 2 to INTERNAL SETTING".
Exit
3. Press the
7
key to set the system in the standby mode.
4. Press the
ENT
key to set or the
CLR
key not to set according to the direction on the screen.
After setting, the screen which appears after turning the power on is displayed.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8
8 – 46
8.5
8.5.6.6 User Memory
This function is used to write the contents currently displayed into the internal memory. The written contents are not cleared by master resetting.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 3 in subsection 8.5.6.1 to open the MAINTENANCE
MENU.
2. Press the 8 key to select "MEMORIZE USER SETTING".
Exit
3. Press the 8 key to set the system in the user memory standby mode.
4. Press the
ENT
key to write or the
CLR
key not to write according to the direction on the screen.
After writing, a message informing the completion of writing appears.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8.5.6.7 Restoring User Memory
This function is used to read the contents written in the internal memory. After reading, the system assumes the transmission standby status.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 to 3 in subsection 8.5.6.1 to open the MAINTENANCE
MENU.
2. Press the
9
key to select "RESTORE USER SETTING".
3. Press the
9
key to set the system in the user memory restoring
Exit standby mode.
4. Press the
ENT
key to restore or the
CLR
key not to restore according to the direction on the screen.
After restoration, the system assumes the transmission standby mode.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
8 – 47
Maintenance Menu
MAINTENANCE MENU
Press an item number key.
0. PREVIOUS MENU
1. ANTENNA HEIGHT
2.
3. ANTENNA SWITCH
4. PARTIAL MASTER RESET
5. ALL MASTER RESET
UP to 5M
6. INTERNAL SETTING to CARD 2
7. CARD 2 to INTERNAL SETTING
8. MEMORIZE USER SETTING
9. RESTORE USER SETTING
5–10M
TRANSFER
10–20M
DISCARD
MORE 20M
To close this menu, Press (SUB MENU) key.
8.5
8
8 – 48
8.5
8.5.7 Adjusting Position to Chart
Adjust the position on the video if it does not correspond to that on the chart in the R+P or plotter
(optional:NDB-33) mode.
8.5.7.1 Adjusting Video and Chart Using Trackball (R+P Mode)
Procedures
1. Press the
SUB
MENU
key to open the SUB MENU.
2. Press the
9
key three times to open the INIT SET #3 menu.
3. Press the 1 key to select "SHIFT COAST LINE #1".
4. Press the 1 key to select the "SETTING".
5. Press the
ENT
key to set the system in the adjusting mode.
6. Move the cursor to the position to be adjusted using the trackball and press the
ENT
key.
7. Move the cursor to another position to be adjusted using the trackball and press the
ENT
key.
Perform positional adjustment. In this case, “Chart adjustment” will be displayed on the upper right corner of the screen.
Cancellation
1. Follow procedures 1 to 4 above to select the "DELETE".
2. Press the
ENT
key.
Position adjustment using the trackball is enabled only in the R+P mode.
Init set #3
INIT
SET #3
1. SHIFT COAST LINE #1
2. SHIFT COAST LINE #2
SETTING
N 0.000’
3. LAT ／ LON CORRECTION
E 0.000’
N 0.000’
E 0.000’
4. CHART CENTER POSITION N 0˚ 00.000’
DELETE
5. DATE ／ TIME
E 0˚ 00.000’
OFF UTC
6.
LOCAL
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8 – 49
8.5
8.5.7.2 Adjusting Video and Chart Position by Entering Adjustment Value
(R+P and Plotter Modes)
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 and 2 in subsection 8.5.7.1 to open the INIT SET #3 menu.
2. Press the
2
key to select "SHIFT COAST LINE #2".
3. Press the
2
key or
ENT
key, enter an adjustment value for N (north latitude) using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT key.
4. Enter an adjustment value for E (east longitude) using numeric keys
( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT
key.
(Use the key for selecting the north latitade, south latitude, east longitude or west longitud.)
Cancellation
1. Follow procedures 1 and 2 above to select "SHIFT COAST LINE #2".
2. Press the
2
key, enter "0" to an adjustment value for N using the
0 key and press the
ENT
key.
Exit
3. Enter "0" to an adjustment value for E using the 0 key and press the
ENT
key.
This cancels position adjustment.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Position adjustment by entering adjustment values is enabled in the R+P and plotter modes.
Init set #3
INIT
SET #3
1. SHIFT COAST LINE #1
2. SHIFT COAST LINE #2
SETTING
N 0.000’
3. LAT ／ LON CORRECTION
E 0.000’
N 0.000’
E 0.000’
4. CHART CENTER POSITION N 0˚ 00.000’
DELETE
5. DATE ／ TIME
E 0˚ 00.000’
OFF UTC
6.
LOCAL
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8
8 – 50
8.5
8.5.7.3 Adjusting Position by Changing Latitude
／ Longitude Information
from GPS (R+P and Plotter Modes)
Since this adjustment changes such data as the stored track, only our service personnel is allowed to use this function.
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 and 2 in subsection 8.5.7.1 to open the INIT SET #3 menu.
2. Press the
3
key to select "LAT
／ LON CORRECTION".
3. Press the
3
key or
ENT
key, enter an adjustment value for N (north latitude) using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT key.
4. Enter an adjustment value for E (east longitude) using numeric keys
( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT
key.
(Use the key for selecting the north latitade, south latitude, east longitude or west longitud.)
Cancellation
1. Follow procedures 1 and 2 above to select "LAT
／ LON CORRECTION".
2. Press the
3
key, enter "0" to an adjustment value for N using the
0 key and press the
ENT
key.
Exit
3. Enter "0" to an adjustment value for E using the 0 key and press the
ENT
key.
This cancels position adjustment.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Init set #3
INIT
SET #3
1. SHIFT COAST LINE #1
2. SHIFT COAST LINE #2
3. LAT ／ LON CORRECTION
4. CHART CENTER POSITION
5. DATE ／ TIME
6.
SETTING
N 0.000’
E 0.000’
N 0.000’
DELETE
E 0.000’
N 0˚ 00.000’
E 0˚ 00.000’
OFF UTC LOCAL
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8 – 51
8.5
8.5.7.4
Adjusting Position by Fixing Own Ship at Screen Center
Procedures
1. Follow procedures 1 and 2 in subsection 8.5.7.1 to open the INIT SET #3 menu.
2. Press the
4
key to select "CHART CENTER POSITION".
Exit
3. Press the
4
key or
ENT
key, enter an center position value for N
(north latitude)/S (South latitude) using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT
key.
4. Enter an center position value for E (east longitude) W (west longitude) using numeric keys ( 0 to
9
) and press the
ENT
key.
The data input from the GPS, if any, is prioritized.
5. Press the
SUB
MENU
key.
Note
● Use this function can be used only when the plotter mode is selected.
Init set #3
INIT
SET #3
1. SHIFT COAST LINE #1
2. SHIFT COAST LINE #2
SETTING
N 0.000’
E 0.000’
N 0.000’ 3. LAT
／ LON CORRECTION
E 0.000’
4. CHART CENTER POSITION N 0˚ 00.000’
DELETE
5. DATE
／ TIME
E 0˚ 00.000’
OFF UTC
6.
LOCAL
0. PREV
9. NEXT
8
8 – 52
9
AFTER-SALES
SERVICE
9
★ When asking for repair
When a system failure is suspended, read Chapter 6, 7, 8 carefully and re-check the abnormal part.
If it is still considered to be a failure, stop the operation at once and consult with the dealer you purchased the product, our sales department or your nearest branch or business office.
● Repair within the warranty period
If the failure occurred under proper operation in accordance with the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC shall repair the product without charging. In case of any other failure occurred due to misoperation or natural disaster, the repair work will be charged.
● Repair after the warranty period has expired
If the product is recoverable by repairing, we will repair it upon your request.
● Items to be identified
✩ Product name, model name, manufacturing date and serial number
✩ Failure condition (as detailed as possible: see the Radar Failure Checklist on Page 9-2.)
✩ Your company/organization name, location and telephone number
★ Recommendation of maintenance inspection
Although it depends on your operating condition, the performance of the product may be lowered due to parts wear.
We recommend maintenance inspection, apart from the normal maintenance work.
For maintenance inspection, consult with the dealer you purchased the product, our sales department, or your nearest branch or business office.
Note that this maintenance inspection will be charged.
For detail of after-sale service, contact the dealer you purchased the product, our sales department, or your nearest branch or business office.
☞ Contact : See the list at the end of the manual.
9 – 1
9
Radar Failure Checklist
When ordering for repair, check the following items, fill in the sheet and send it to us. If there is any uncertain items, contact your ship and give us correct information on the product.
Ship name:____________________ Phone:____________________ Fax:____________________
Radar general model name: JMA-____________________ Serial No.:____________________
(Write the full model name correctly)
(1) Check the following items in the order of the number, and circle the applicable answer between YES or NO.
If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (17), Others.
(2) If any of the items (1) through (5) is marked as NO, check the fuse of the product (refer to section 8.2,
8.3).
(3) Check the items (4) through (16) while the transmission (TX) is ON.
No.
* Functions mentioned in the items (14) through (16) may be optional. If the function is optional, answer is not necessary.
Check Item
(1) Power can be turned on. (The lamp on the operation panel is lit.)
Result
YES NO
(2) A few minutes after powering-on, it will become stand-by status (TX Ready).
YES NO
(3) When powering-on (or TX ON), the CRT displays something (CRT is lit).
YES NO
(4) The scanner rotates at the transmission (TX) ON.
(Check the following items while transmission is ON.)
YES NO
(5)
(6)
Current is supplied to the magnetron. (Refer to subsection 8.1.2.8.)
Tuning is enabled. (Check with the range of 6NM or more.)
(7) Fixed marker is displayed.
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO
YES NO (8) VRM is displayed.
(9)
White noise is displayed while set at STC, FTC minimum, GAIN maximum,
IR-OFF and range 48NM.
(10) Target reflection echo is displayed.
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES NO (11) Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal.
(12) EBL is displayed.
(13) Cursor mark moves.
*(14) GYRO course can be set and normally displayed.
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
*(15) LOG speed can be normally displayed.
*(16) ATA works normally.
YES NO
YES NO
(17) Others (Error message, etc)
9
9 – 2
10
DISPOSAL
10.1 Equipment Disposal ··········································10-1
10.2 Disposal of Used Batteries ·······························10-2
10.3 Disposal of Used Magnetron ····························10-3
10.1
Equipment Disposal
Dispose of this equipment by following the ordinances or regulations of the local authorities in charge of the disposal site.
10 – 1
10.2
Disposal of Used Batteries
WARNING
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate by affixing tape to the positive and negative terminals or by other means. Otherwise, short-circuiting may occur, resulting in heat generation, bursting or ignition.
On this equipment, lithium batteries is used for:
BT1 in the CPU control circuit (PC4401) (Maxell ER3)
Checking and Replacing the Battery
• The JMA-7700 series radar stores the tracks, marks, waypoints, and other settings in its internal lithium memory. These items of information sre lost when the internal battery is exhausted.
• Checking the Battery
The life expectancy of the lithium battery is approximately 5 years after production. When the service life of the battery is nearing its end, check its output voltage. Replace the battery if it reads lower than
3.0 volts.
• Battery replacement procedure
Replace the battery BT1 in the CMC-1055B CPU circuit board.
Be careful for making short-circuit between the battrey terminal.
The data on the memory is sustained by super-capacitance for a short period of time.
● Do not keep used lithium batteries but dispose of them immediately after as non-combustible waste.
● Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate by affixing tape to the positive and negative terminals or by other means. In the area where used batteries are separated from other waste, dispose of them by following the local regulations.
For detail, consult your local distributor, our sales office or your local government.
10
10 – 2
10.3
Disposal of Used Magnetron
The scanner in this radar use a magnetron (NKE-1055 ／ 1056).
● After replacing it, return the used one to your local distributor or our sales office.
For detail, ask your local distributor or our sales office.
10 – 3
11
SPECIFICATION
11.1
General Specification JMA-7710-6
／
JMA-7725-6
／ JMA-7725-9 ································11-1
11.2
Scanner Unit NKE-1055-6 ·································11-2
11.3
Scanner Unit NKE-1056-6M
／ 9M ····················11-3
11.4
Display Unit NCD-3901-2 ···································11-4
11.5
ATA NCA-843 (Optional) ···································11-7
11.6
Inputable Signal ·················································11-7
11.7
Outputable Signal ··············································11-8
11.8
Standard Equipment Configuration ················· 11-8
11.9
Installing Clearance between Equipment ········11-8
11.10 Others (Optional) ···············································11-8
11
Specification
11.1
General Specification JMA-7710-6
／ JMA7725-6 ／
JMA-7725-9
1)
2)
3)
4)
Type of emission:
Display type:
Display panel:
Range scales:
P0N
Raster scan, PPI method, vertically long display
Bright 21-inch color CRT (radar video effective diameter of
250mm min.)
0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6 , 12, 24, 32, 48, and 96
／ 120nm
Maximum range: 10kW = 96nm
25kW = 120nm
5) Range resolution: 25m max.
6) Minimum detective range: 28m max.
7) Range scale accuracy:
8)
9)
Bearing accuracy:
Bearing resolution:
1% of the maximum operating range or 30m, whichever larger.
±1 degree max.
1.5 degrees (6ft)
10) Bearing display:
11) Ambient conditions:
1.1 degrees (9ft)
Relative bearing, true bearing, course-up and stabilized course-up
Temperature
Scanner: –25
°C to +55°C
(Storage: –25
°C to +70°C)
Equipment other than scanner: –15
°C to +55°C
Relative humidity
All equipment: +40
°C, 93%
Vibration
All equipment:
2 to 13.2Hz with excursion of
±1mm±10%
13.2 to 100Hz with constant maximum acceleration of 7 m/s
2
AC100
／ 110, 220V, 50 ／ 60Hz, 1ø
10kW = Approx. 530VA
12) Power supply input:
13) Power consumption:
25kW = Approx. 550VA
14) Power supply input fluctuation: AC100 ／ 110, 220V
±10%
15) Pre-heating time: 10kW = Approx. 90 sec
25kW = Approx. 3 min
16) From standby to operation: 15 sec. max.
11 – 1
11
11.2
Scanner Unit NKE-1055-6
1) Outside dimensions:
2) Mass:
3) Plane of polarization:
4) Beam width:
Approx. height 440
Approx. 36kg
× approx. swing circle 1910 (mm)
Horizontal polarization
Horizontal beam width = 1.2 degrees
Vertical beam width = 25 degrees
Side lobe level
Within
±10 degrees = –26dB max.
Outside
±10 degrees = –30dB max.
Approx. 24rpm 5) Antenna rotation:
6) Transmission output: 10kW
7) Transmission frequency: 9410
±30MHz
8) Transmission tube: Magnetron MSF1425B
9) Transmission pulse length/repetition frequency:
10) Transmission switch:
Short Standard
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
1.5nm
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz 0.2µs ／ 2080Hz
3nm 0.2
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
6nm
12nm
0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
0.8
µs ／ 780Hz
0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
0.8
µs ／ 780Hz
24nm
32nm
48nm
96nm
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
Circulator + Diode limiter
Long
0.2
1.2
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
0.8
µs ／ 780Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
µs ／ 520Hz
11) Mixer: MIC front end
12) Intermediate frequency amplifier: Intermediate frequency = 60MHz
Band width = 20MHz (0.08
µs)
6MHz (0.2 and 0.4
µs)
3MHz (0.8 and 1.2
µs)
Gain = 90dB min.
13)
14)
Overall noise figure:
Wind Load:
Receiver characteristic = Logarithmic receiver
7.5dB (average)
51.5m/s (100 knots) relative
11
11 – 2
11
11.3
Scanner Unit NKE-1056-6M
／ 9M
1)
2)
Outside dimensions:
Mass:
Approx. height 519
× approx. swing circle 1910 (mm) (6ft)
Approx. height 519
× approx. swing circle 2836 (mm) (9ft)
Approx. 42kg (6ft)
Approx. 47kg (9ft)
Horizontal polarization 3) Plane of polarization:
4) Beam width: Horizontal beam width = 1.2 degrees (6ft)
Horizontal beam width = 0.8 degrees (9ft)
Vertical beam width = 25 degrees (6ft)
Vertical beam width = 25 degrees (9ft)
Side lobe level
Within
±10 degrees = –26dB max. (6 to 9ft)
Outside
±10 degrees = –30dB max. (6 to 9ft)
Approx. 24rpm 5) Antenna rotation:
6) Transmission output: 25kW
7) Transmission frequency: 9410
±30MHz
8) Transmission tube: Magnetron M1437(A)
9) Transmission pulse length/repetition frequency:
10) Transmission switch:
Short Standard
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz
1.5nm
0.08
µs ／ 2080Hz 0.2µs ／ 2080Hz
3nm 0.2
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
6nm 0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
0.8
µs ／ 780Hz
12nm 0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
0.8
µs ／ 780Hz
24nm
32nm
48nm
120nm
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
Circulator + Diode limiter
Long
0.2
1.2
µs ／ 2080Hz
0.4
µs ／ 1560Hz
0.8
µs ／ 780Hz
1.2
µs ／ 520Hz
µs ／ 520Hz
11) Mixer: MIC front end
12) Intermediate frequency amplifier: Intermediate frequency = 60MHz
Band width = 20MHz (0.08
µs)
6MHz (0.2 and 0.4
µs)
3MHz (0.8 and 1.2
µs)
Gain = 90dB min.
13)
14)
Overall noise figure:
Wind Load:
Receiver characteristic = Logarithmic receiver
7.5dB (average)
51.5m/s (100 knots) relative
11 – 3
11
11.4
Display Unit NCD-3901-2
1)
2)
Structure:
Outside dimensions:
Desktop type
Approx. W400
× H658 × D795 (mm)
(However, the dimension of the handle is excluded from the width.)
3) Mass: Approx. 63 kg.
4)
5)
6)
Display:
Number of pixels:
Display area:
Vertical 21-inch color CRT
1024
× 768
Approx. 405
× 305 (mm)
7) Color, gradation and brilliance
Radar video
Gradation:
Video color:
Brilliance control:
Radar track
Gradation:
Video color:
Brilliance control:
Fixed marker/VRM/EBL
16 (8 in radar trail display mode)
1 (yellow, green, orange)
4 steps
1
1 (sky, white, green)
4 steps (simultaneous control with radar video)
8)
Video color:
Brilliance level:
Cyan
4 steps
The following brilliance levels are simultaneously changed.
Letter/dial plane
Video color:
Brilliance level:
SHM/cursor
Video color:
White
4 steps
Brilliance level:
Range/scale spacing:
White
4 steps
Range
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
1.5nm
3nm
6nm
12nm
24nm
32nm
48nm
96nm
120nm
Scale spacing Number of rings
0.0625nm
0.125nm
2
2
0.25nm
0.25nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
1nm
2nm
4nm
8nm
8nm
16nm
20nm
2
3
6
6
6
6
6
4
6
6
6
(10kW only)
(25kW only)
11
11 – 4
11
9)
10)
11)
Screen display mode:
Variable range scale:
Electronic cursor:
Radar mode
North-up (TM/RM/SRM/CTM), course-up (TM/RM/SRM/
CTM), head-up (RM/SRM) and stabilized course-up (CTM)
Composite mode
North-up (TM/CTM) and course-up (TM/CTM)
Plotter mode (when optional NDB-33 is installed)
North-up (TM) and course-up (TM)
2 (digital display)
Range display unit: nm and km
0.000 to 295.0nm (0.000 to 547.0km)
2 (digital display)
Second EBL can be floated (first one is fixed).
Second EBL can be switched to parallel index lines.
000.0 to 359.9 degrees (in 0.1 degree unit)
Can be switched between bearing display unit, relative bearing and
12) Cursor: true bearing.
Displays the range, bearing and L ／ L (when GPS and GYRO are connected.)
Moved using the trackball.
13) Tuning method:
14) Sea clutter restraint:
Manual and auto (tuning indication bar attached)
Manual and auto
15) Rain clutter restraint: Manual and auto
16) Radar interference rejection: Built-in
17) Bearing scale:
18) Bow display:
19) Guard zone alarm:
20) Off center:
21) TM display:
22) TM reset position:
1-degree scale, 360 degrees
Electronic (stern marker can also be displayed)
Can be switched between "OFF", "IN" and "OUT".
Buzzer sound available.
Range storing function equipped (1 sector ring)
Up to 66% of radius of any scale except 96 and 120nm
Built-in (excluding 96 and 120nm)
66% of radius
23)
24)
25)
26)
Double zoom:
Radar trail:
Pulse width switch:
Target enhancement:
Manually resettable
Within 66% of radius from the zoom center (excluding 0.125nm)
* Available only when RM is selected in the radar mode.
TM radar trail in TM
RM radar trail in RM
Radar Trails interval: 1min, 3min, 6min, 12min, 15min, 30min,
60min, continuous
Radar trail can automatically be cleared by switching range or resetting TM.
Long/short (0.75, 1.5, 3, 6 and 12nm)
Built-in
11 – 5
27) Operating positions
(1) By controls
(1) Tuning control: TUNE
(2) Snow/rain clutter restraining control: RAIN
(3) Sea clutter restraining control: SEA
(4) Gain adjusting control:
(5) Brilliance:
(6) VRM:
(7) EBL:
GAIN
BRILL
VRM
EBL
VRM (8) VRM:
(2) By switch
(1) Power supply switch:
(3) By keys
PWR
(1) Main menu key:
(2) Sub menu key:
(3) Enter key:
(4) Range expanding key:
(5) Range reducing key:
(6) Panel light key:
(7) Day/night mode selecting key:
(8) Range scale brilliance key:
MAIN MENU
SUB MENU
ENT
RANGE +
RANGE –
PANEL
DAY/NIGHT
RR
(9) Bearing mode key:
(10) Pulse width selecting key:
(11) TM reset key:
(12) TM/RM key:
AZI MODE
PL
TM RST
TM/RM
(13) Center moving key: OFF CENT
(14) Ship's head marker brilliance key: HL OFF
(15) Alarm reset key:
(16) VRM control key:
ALARM ACK
VRM1/VRM2
(17) VRM control key:
(18) EBL control key:
(19) EBL control key:
(20) Function selecting key:
(21) Guard alarm key:
(22) Transmission/standby key:
(23) Ten key 0:
(24) Ten key 1:
VRM OFF
EBL1/EBL2
EBL OFF
FUNC
GZ MENU
TX/STBY
0
1
(25) Ten key 2:
(26) Ten key 3:
(27) Ten key 4:
(28) Ten key 5:
(29) Ten key 6:
(30) Ten key 7:
(31) Ten key 8:
(32) Ten key 9:
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
11 – 6
11
11
11
(33) Clear key: CLR
(34) Reverse key:
(35) Numerical value display key:
(36) Acquisition key:
TGT DATA
ACQ
DEGAUSS (37) Degauss key:
(4) Special keys
(1) Floating EBL key:
(2) Vector + key:
(3) Vector - key:
(4) Vector key:
F EBL
VECT+
VECT–
VECT
[Keys that are enabled when the ATA is used]
(1) Target canceling key: TGT CNCL
[Switches available when optional equipment is installed]
(1) Starting point key:
(2) End point key:
(3) Mark key:
(4) Track key:
MARK MENU
OWN TRK
11.5
ATA NCA-843 (Optional)
1) Acquisition : Manual acquisition and automatic acquisition (according to the guard zone)
2) Maximum tracking target : 30 targets, automatic tracking
3) Maximum tracking range : 32 nm
4) Tracking data display : One target data display
Range and bearing of a target
CPA and TCPA of a target
5)
6)
7)
8)
Vector display:
Past point display
Dangerous target alarm
Another ship's track
True course and true speed of a target
: Relative or true
: Past four points
Display intervals; 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes
: By setting the CPA ／ TCPA
: 10 ships; 800 points each
: Seven colors; Can be classified by color.
: Storage intervals; 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute,
3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes
11.6
Inputable Signal
1) Navigation system
Equipment capable of outputting NMEA0182/NMEA0183 (GLL, GGA, VTG, RMB and
RMC) or JRC-format signals.
2) Gyro
SYNC/PULSE: 360X, 180X, 90X and 36X
11 – 7
3) Log
SYNCHRO:
PULSE:
360X, 180X, 90X and 36X
800, 400, 200, 100
4) 2-axis log
NMEA0183 (VBW) (incompatible with electronic compass)
5) External event mark
Key input
6) Radar buoy
11.7
Outputable Signal
1) External alarm
2) Sub display unit signal (radar adaptor and operation analyzer)
3) Remote monitor (using vertical multi-scan monitor) (CFQ-8914 connector option)
11.8
Standard Equipment Configuration
Scanner unit:
Display unit:
Installation cable:
1 unit
1 unit
Between display and scanner unit
Typ. 15m (scanner connector)
Performance monitor: 1 unit
Cable for Performance monitor: Typ. 15m
Installing tools:
Standard spare parts:
1 set
1 set
Hood:
Installation manual:
1 unit
1 (Japanese or English)
11.9
Installing Clearance between Equipment
Between scanner and display unit
Between performance monitor and display unit
Max. Typ.
30m 15m
30m 15m
11.10 Others (Optional)
ATA function (built-in):
Plotter function (built-in):
Cover made of duck:
Installation cable (20m):
Installation cable (30m):
NCA-843
NDB-33
MTT305811
CFQ-8681-20
CFQ-8681-30
11 – 8
11
11
12
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 Radar System Circuit Code List
Appendix 2 Circuit Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6 and
JMA-7725-6
／ 9
Appendix 3 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar
Type JMA-7710-6
Appendix 4 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar
Type JMA-7725-6
／ 9
Appendix 5 Primary Power Supply System Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6 and JMA-7725-6
／ 9
Appendix 6 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit
Type NKE-1055
Appendix 7 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit
Type NKE-1056
Appendix 8 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit
Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 9 Power Supply Connection Diagram of Display
Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 10 NSK Log Selection Switches of Display Unit
Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 11 Setting Table of the Speed Log Select
Switches of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 12 Setting Table of the Gyro Compass and Gyro
Select Switches of Display Unit Type NCD-
3901-2
A
Appendix
Appendix 1: Radar System Circuit Code List
◎ General code
JMA-7710-6: 10kW, 2 units, 6-feet scanner
JMA-7725-6: 25kW, 2 units, 6-feet scanner
JMA-7725-9: 25kW, 2 units, 9-feet scanner
◎ Scanner unit
NKE-1055 (10kW)
NMA-469A:
NRG-210A:
NAX-16A-6:
CQD-1547:
CQC-931:
CBP-136:
CNM-200:
CME-261A:
CMA-662:
CAE-344-3:
CBP-143:
CQD-1735:
Modulator
Receiver
Radiator
Internal equipment of scanner
Internal equipment of transmitter receiver
Motor
Internal equipment of modulator
Modulator circuit PC201
Internal equipment of receiver
IF amplifier circuit PC301
Moter control circuit PC101
Internal equipment of slow starter
NKE-1056 (25kW)
NMA-470:
NRG-210A:
Modulator
Receiver
NAX-16A-6/NAX-16A-9: Radiator
CQC-959: Internal equipment of scanner (with diode limiter)
CMH-1562A:
CNM-201:
CPA-209:
CMA-662:
Interface circuit PC101
Internal equipment of modulator
Modulator circuit PC210
Internal equipment of receiver
CAE-344-3:
CBP-143:
CQD-1736:
IF amplifier circuit PC301
Moter control circuit PC101
Internal equipment of slow starter
◎ Performance monitor
NJU-64
A – 1
Appendix 1 (continued)
◎ Display unit
NCD-3901-2
CML-576:
CFQ-8945:
CMJ-304C:
CQD-1651:
CMC-1055B:
CED-44B:
CCK-816:
CCK-817:
CCK-790E:
CBD-1448:
CBA-313:
CSC -581:
CDC-1013:
Internal circuit of display unit
Mother board circuit PC4101
NSK circuit PC4201
Terminal board circuit PC4301
CPU control circuit PC4401
Time base circuit PC4402
Panel circuit 1 PC4501
Panel circuit 2 PC4502
Panel circuit 3 PC4503
Power supply circuit PC5101
Power converter PC5102
Relay circuit PC4701
ATA circuit PC4403 (Option)
◎ Installation cable
CFQ-8681-15:
2695111150:
Installation cable for between the display and scanner (15m)
Cable for performance monitor (15m standard)
APPENDIX
A – 2
Appendix 2 Circuit Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6 and JMA-7725-6/9
Appendix 3 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6
Appendix 4 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7725-6/9
Appendix 5 Primary Power Supply System Diagram of Radar Type JMA-7710-6 and
JMA-7725-6/9
Appendix 6 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1055
Appendix 7 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit Type NKE-1056
Appendix 8 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
+15VH +15V
+15V 1.1A
-15V 0.33A
CD19 EM1Z
A K
R42R43 1K
C38 220U
C37 0.1U 50V
CD21 EM1Z
K
A
C43 220U 63V
C42 0.1U 50V
R41 10 3W
C35 220U 63V
C34 0.1U 50V
C36 0.33U 50V
C40 220U 63V
C39 0.1U 50V
C41 0.1U 50V
+24VH +24V
R47 2.2K 2W
C45 220U 63V
C44 0.1U 50V
24V 0.2A
A K
+5VH +5V
5V 6.6A
J5104 J5104 J5104
5 6 7
J5108 J5108
1 2
R107 3K 3W
+1
K
CD44 EM1Z
A
6
C77 0.1U
A
K
R57 1.2K
C53 0.1 50V
R53 15K 2W
A
K
RV1 500
R53 1K
R54 470
R58 5.1K 5W
1000U 160V
C50 0.1U 250V
J5109 J5109 J5109 J5109
1 2 3 4
R61 10 1/4W
CD47 HZ5C-1
R105 10K 1/4W
R62 24K 1/8W
R112 220 1/2W C82 22P 500V
K A
C32 33P
R60 4.7K 1/8W
R8 0.047 2W
K
R7 10K 1W
A
K
CD5 RG4C
R3 68K 3W
A
TR1 25K1120
A K
R5 33 1W
CD2 TLG124A
100K 3W
1000U 250V
100K 3W
1000U 250V
R16 1K 1/8W
R17 220V 1/8W
R15 1K 1/4W
R18 1K
C12 0.1U
R14 1K 1/8W
C11 120U 50V
L21 SA7/6/4.5B
R19 220 1/8W
CD43 EM1Z
R103 220 1W
R36 4.7 1/4W
R37 4.7 1/4W
C2 2200P 400V
CB 0.1U 250V
C3 2200P 400V
ACH ACR
C1 0.1U 250V
1 2 3 4 5 6
J5101 J5101 J5101 J5101 J5101 J5101
R10 22K 5W
CD7 RG4C
R101 22 2W
C9 2700P 2KV
C10 120U 50V
K
A
CD8 HZ24BP
R9 47K 5W
TR2 I
K
R13 0.1 2W
A
R12 10K 1W
R98 120 1W R11 10
C17 0.1U 50V
C18 100U 25V
R25 10 1W
C19 33U 25V
C20 0.1U 50V
R24 10
R102 10K 1W
R26 2.2 1/4W
R35 22 1/2W
C30 470U 25V
C23 470U 25V
C22 0.1U 50V R30 20K 1/8W
R33 22 1/2W
C25 22U 16V
23 VREF
18 19 20 17 16 21 22 15 14 24
OUT1 EM OUT2 EM
RC2 OC2 RC2 OC2 OCL
DVL 12
OTC1 FB1 II
1 2 3 4
DTC2 FB2 II
9 8 5 6
11 10
CT RT
C31 0.22U 50V
C76 0.1U 50V
R32 30K 1/8W
C29 220P 50V
R31 24K 1/8W
C24 0.1U
R93 20K
C27 100U 25V
R27 4.7K 1/8W
R29 24K 1/8W
R28 4.7K 1/8W
3 4
8 7
ON/OFF FB1 RT CT OTC
15 16
C14 0.1U 50V
R21 24K 1/8W
C13 2.2U 16V
R23 24K 1/8W
R22 10K 1/8W
C15 470P 50V
R20 510 1/8W
CBD-1448 (1/2)
Appendix 9.1 Power Supply Connection Diagram of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
CBD-1448 (2/2)
Appendix 9.2 Power Supply Connection Diagram of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
J5202 J5202
2 3
J5202 J5202 J5202 J5202 J5202
4 5 6 7 8
R19 6.2K 1/2W
R20 1K 3W
A K
CD4 TLG124A
C9 4700U 63V
C8 0.1U 250V
10 11 12 13
2 3 4 5 6 7
R1 22
2 3 4 5 6
R16 0.047 2W R17 0.047 2W
TR1 2SK1
K A
CD1 HZ18BP
A K
CD2 HZ18BP
CD5 SM-1XN02
R21 10 1/4W
R7 47
CD6 SM-1XN02
R22 10
R8 3.3K
R6 3.3 1/2W
11 13
AO VC
10K 1/2W R12 10K 1/2W
R10 47
C5 2700P 50V
7 14
R9 220 1/4W
8 3
SST SYN
TR2 25K1
R15 100 1/4W
R14 100 1/4W
C6 1000P 50V
R13 33 1/2W
C3 33U 35V
1 4
R5 1.5K
R2 220 1/4W R3 2.2K 1/4W R4 8.2K 1/4W
C2 100P 50V
C10 470U 25V
CBA-313 (1/1)
Appendix 9.3 Power Supply Connection Diagram of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 10 NSK Log Selection Switches of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
Appendix 11 Setting Table of the Speed Log Select Switches of Display Unit Type
NCD-3901-2
Appendix 12 Setting Table of the Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches of Display Unit Type NCD-3901-2
●
Main Office
Akasaka Twin Tower(Main)
17-22,Akasaka 2-chome,
Minato-ku,Tokyo 107-8432 JAPAN
Maritime Sales Department
Phone:＋81-3-3584-8833
Fax :＋81-3-3584-8757
International Business Department
Phone:＋81-3-3584-8836
Fax :＋81-3-3584-8878
Communications Equipment Marketing
Department
Phone:＋81-3-3584-8845
Fax :＋81-3-3584-8879
●
Mitaka Plant
1-1,Shimorenjaku 5-chome,Mitaka
Tokyo 181-8510 JAPAN
Phone:＋81-422-45-9111
Fax :＋81-422-45-9110
●
JRC (UK) Limited
136, 1st Floor, Friars House,
157/168 Blackfriars Road,
London SE18 EZ, U.K.
Phone:＋44-20-7261-1188
Fax :＋44-20-7803-0996
● U.S.A....
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd./Seattle Branch
1011 SW Klickitat Way
Bldg.B, Suite 100
Seattle, WA 98134 U. S. A.
Phone:＋1-206-654-5644
Fax :＋1-206-654-7030
U.S.A
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
Nisshin Foods Building, Suite 208
2125 Center Avenue, Fort lee N. J. 07024, U. S. A.
Phone:＋1-201-242-1822
Fax :＋1-201-242-1885
● Netherlands
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd. Amsterdam Branch
Cessnalaan 40-42,1119NL Schiphol-Rijk
The NETHERLANDS
Phone:＋31-20-658-0750
Fax :＋31-20-658-0755
●
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
Graha Surya Internusa 7th F1. (suite 703A)
J1. H.R. Rasuna Said Kav. X-O.
Jakarta 12950, INDONESIA
Phone:＋62-21-527-3010
Fax :＋62-21-527-3013
●
●
Philippines
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
2320 Taft Avenue
Malate,Manila PHILIPPINES
Phone:＋63-2-524-8565･525-3589
Fax :＋63-2-521-5049
Thailand
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
Charturong Arphon Building
457 Phra Sumaru Street
Bangkok 10200 THAILAND
Phone/Fax:＋66-2-280-0401
● India
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
Best Western Surya Hotel, Business Centre
New Friends Colony, New Delhi 110065, INDIA
Phone: ＋91-11-691-9294･691-9297
Fax : ＋91-11-691-9305
●
Taiwan
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
7F No.146,Sung Chiang Road
Taipei TAIWAN,R.O.C.
Phone:＋886-2-2571-3100
Fax :＋886-2-2571-2999
● Spain
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
Calle Luis Doreste Silva, 50-1-B De Las
Palmas De Gran Canaria SPAIN
Phone:＋34-928-290076
Fax :＋34-928-293755
● Singapore
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
c/o CODAR(PTE.)LTD.
315 Outram Road #11-06/07 Tan Boon Liat
Building Singapore 169074 SINGAPORE
Phone:＋65-2229190
Fax :＋65-2229398
● Greece
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
57, Akti Miaouli Piraeus GREECE
Phone: ＋30-1-429-3304･429-3305
Fax : ＋30-1-429-3306
Korea
Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.
Room 202, Whadong Bldg. 84-18, 4-GA
Chungang-Dong, Chung-Ku, Pusan, KOREA
Phone: ＋82-51-441-0035
Fax : ＋82-51-464-0695
01.05
advertisement